JP7409884B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 Publication

The gaming machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed in various displays such as an award amount display and a notification display. Furthermore, the gaming machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states, for example. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and background images.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that variably displays performance identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when the performance identification information becomes a specific display mode,
a movable body capable of moving between a first position that is a retreat position, a second position that is a suggestion position, and a third position that is a production position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means;
The performance execution means is
A specific performance that notifies the user that moving the movable body results in a performance result and the specific display mode and is controlled to the advantageous state; and moving the movable body before the specific performance is executed. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the specific performance is to be executed by
In the advantageous state that is controlled after notifying that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state,
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A grant amount display regarding the grant amount of gaming value can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
On the front side of the background display , a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount. A second notification display that is displayed, and a second notification display that is displayed.
The award amount after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means, which can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which winning is impossible or difficult, changes from the second state to the first state. display is possible and
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed without displaying the predetermined display at the start of the award amount display,
The grant amount display is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has passed from the start of the display,
The notification display is a display that ends after the specified period of time has elapsed from the start of the display,
The text display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the text display included in the provision amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character display is formed;
The background display is not visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the provision amount display,
The background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the notification display,
The specific character display included in the notification display has a smaller ratio of the specific area to the area forming the character display than the specific character display included in the application amount display,
The movable body is
In the suggestion production, the first position and the second position are movable,
In the specific performance, the first position and the third position are movable;
It is characterized by
In addition, in order to achieve the above object, the other gaming machines are gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51. a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and in the second display area, the On the front side of the background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the amount of awarded gaming value. (e.g., it is possible to display an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls received), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, it is notified that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. The notification displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display ``1000 over'' when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``1000'', and (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated for a specific period after the start of the display. (For example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display.), and the characters used for the notification display are The characters are larger in size than the characters used to display the amount awarded (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK), and the above-mentioned The characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are , a specific area surrounded by lines forming a character includes a specific character, etc.), and the specific character used for displaying the amount of addition is such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the background image is not visible from the specific area). , The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK indicate that the background video is not visible from the specific area, etc.), The specific characters used in the notification display indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area, etc. For example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background image is visible from a specific area, etc.)
The display means is capable of displaying the notification display when displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display when displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK). displaying 20SHKH, etc.),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Furthermore, since an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive gaming value is awarded in a short period of time when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. It is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high due to the numeric value data being set, and to perform performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-83580, a predetermined number of changes are made to a high probability state (variable probability state), which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state than the normal state. There are gaming machines that are controlled over the number of times they are displayed.

However, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) that is controlled again to the high probability state (variable probability state) repeatedly occurs, and a large amount of game balls, which are game media, are sold out for a short period of time. There is a problem in that there are cases where the bonus is given in advance, and there is a fear that the gambling desire of the player may be excessively aroused.

This invention was made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent excessive gaming value from being given in a short period of time and the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high. purpose.

The gaming machine of Means 1 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and also has a normal state and a special state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to (a high-accuracy high base state or a low-accuracy high base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed of awarding gaming value, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive It is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high due to the addition of gaming value, and it is also possible to perform performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance period of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the performance operation example of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining count display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display is displayed in a fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning a prize occurs during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure showing an example of presentation operation when over winning occurs in characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over winning effect in the characteristic part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the performance control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. It is a figure which shows the update example of a 1st pending storage display area and a 2nd pending storage display area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 being off and super reach α2 being off. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 being off and super reach β2 being off. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable object suggesting motion and the image enlargement rate in each enlarged display period. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows the performance mode up to the reach performance in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic part 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern and the ball release state flag. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine of the feature section 162SG. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko gaming machine of the feature section 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of a ball release state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball release state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the progress of the jackpot and the opening/closing situation of the jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball release state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a jackpot (excluding probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a loss. It is. (A) is a diagram showing a first pending storage display area and a second pending storage display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of updating the first pending storage display area and the second pending storage display area. . 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of preview production decision processing. It is a diagram showing tables A to C for determining the type of preview performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for failure. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for failure selected according to the value of the ball release state flag.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is comprised of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), etc., and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command captured at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of acquired balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, which are lighting examples when all the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state and time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a performance waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the end determination based on the count value of the number of special symbol variations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start performance is not in standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening number counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the characteristic section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variable" or "non-probable variable" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If the game is waiting for the next release at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. The grand prize opening time which is the upper limit of the time for which the mouth is kept open is set. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening at step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the game control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been met (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042 AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after the opening of the big winning hole. After updating the value to "6" corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission setting of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a big winning hole opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a big winning hole after opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined that the number of executions of the round that leaves the big winning hole open has reached the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), from the main board 11 side. A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 to . When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball that is present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set to 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before the number of wins or the number of rounds is displayed, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1", and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the n-th jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c emits light, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, displays a count-up display (notices that the number of wins increases), and then displays the winning number to update the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042 AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the (n+1)th R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the (n+1) R is received (Step 042AKS065; Yes), "1" is added to n (Step 042AKS066), and various display processing is performed. end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and it is the second round, until the predetermined period has passed, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of performance operation displays, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5 step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. Note that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the production effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, at the same time or with a time difference, such as in the downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period of time elapses, the right-handed display is continued as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time required for the counting switch 23 to detect the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after time passes without winning from the state shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should play right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting up the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot performance and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R are A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the 2nd round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. In addition, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the first R is displayed continuously. From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onwards, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win during the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win an additional prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly identifies A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the grand prize opening, and to enjoy the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, when the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole As shown in Figure 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare performance that indicates that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the performance control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second round and onwards.

Furthermore, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance that follows, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the grand prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the jackpot performance is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is displayed continuously from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has passed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may only be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the number of wins displayed, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of the same parts as in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the specified command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined prize After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, instead of displaying "0000", "0015" may be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is configured to provide the gaming value when the gaming medium enters the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating ``0015'', a display corresponding to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, a count-up display is performed to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase, and then ``0015'' is displayed) ).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may display a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. Start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving it (for example, start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the big prize opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is configured to lead the gaming medium to a winning path (for example, a large winning path) by being in the first state. By opening the winning slot door, the ejected game ball passes through the first route and is guided to the big winning slot, etc.), and when the winning slot door is in the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge route. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the fired game ball passes through a second route in the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge route) and a detection means (for example, count switch 23, etc.) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game medium, and the time from the route forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for the game ball present in the big winning opening door part to be detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, the player Perform an operation promotion display to promote operation (for example, after a jackpot is achieved and until the jackpot is opened, a right-hand hit effect as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3) can be performed to increase the number of players playing the game. (e.g., displaying to the player that he or she should hit the ball with the right hand).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the opening has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 may send a large prize opening specifying command.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the ejected game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball is ejected by performing a right-handed performance before the start of the first round) However, it is possible to win at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if the prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched between them (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball, as shown in FIG. 10-15). (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the player is stuck in the device 7 (more specifically, between the jackpot door and the glass door frame 3a), and the first round game when the jackpot game state is controlled again to the advantageous state. If the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means by changing the variable winning means from the second state to the first state, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next jackpot occurs, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the first round, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the control has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state has entered the state until the big winning opening changes from the closed state to the open state) can be executed. (such as possible), and at the same time as the display of the award amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, after the jackpot is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and,
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, (such as a CPU 103 that plays a round game), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that is awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game) displaying a number, etc.), after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. The award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and the game medium enters the variable prize means within the predetermined period. If not, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is If the game medium wins within the variable prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.). , further comprising a light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means controls the game medium after the predetermined period has elapsed. Controlling the light emitting means in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium in the case where the winning means is won by the variable winning means and in the case where the game medium is won in the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period ( For example, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means. etc.) and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means is , the number of times of light emission per unit time is greater than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot performance The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the effect lamp 9 emits light per unit time (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above further includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is configured to operate when a game medium wins a prize in the variable prize winning means. A winning sound corresponding to a winning is output, and even if the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, or if the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the entered prize is output. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( (e.g., displaying the number of rounds obtained), it is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and the first round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened), and the number of rounds won is displayed after the second round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the grand prize opening is opened.) If the game medium does not enter the variable prize means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the elapsed time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is changed to the variable amount. When a prize is won by the prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are played, a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not enter the variable prize winning means within the period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, If the game medium does not enter the grand prize hole within a predetermined period after the grand prize hole is opened, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), if the game medium is not entered into the big prize hole, the information displayed in the previous round game will be displayed. within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are played (such as continuously displaying the number of wins obtained). If the game medium wins in the variable winning means, the amount awarded according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added from the amount displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium enters the corresponding big prize slot within a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game will be changed to , the number of acquired balls awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed), etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of a gaming medium in the variable winning means. After the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the updating display of the awarded amount display ends before the variable winning means returns to the first state again (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). (For example, the count-up display and the display of the number of winnings corresponding to the over winnings may be completed within a period from when the winning state is closed to when the winning state is opened corresponding to the second round.)

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays content on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is the variable winning means. is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is better than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display is displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed so that more of the light emitting means emit light than when it is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) , in a situation where the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, but the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20). As shown in (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and during a predetermined period It is characterized by the fact that many production effect lamps 9 emit light, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed and improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform the operation is displayed. The light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emitting means before the predetermined period elapses. When the applied amount display is not displayed, the specified light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the applied amount display is displayed. 10-7 (c-3), the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are lit alternately, and the grand prize opening is opened. If the production effect lamps 9 are to be lit in sequence later to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off and remains lit as shown in Figure 10-9 (c-15). (e.g.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round game ends when a certain number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened.) The time is sufficient for the game media to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the grand prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count from the elapse of the predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) period), etc.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one of the round games ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, when 10 game media are won). The period from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is the period when the game medium is in the second state. It is enough time to win a certain number of prizes (for example, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if you count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed, As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. (e.g., causing the production effect lamp 9 to emit light from the scene).

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. A round game in which it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the following (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and the round game being executed can be identified at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute an in-round effect corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, and performing a jackpot effect after a predetermined period has elapsed), and at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round effect. The light emitting means is caused to emit light at a timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance, etc.) , it may be done as follows.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10, etc.) in which game media can be won, and the display means It is possible to display the amount of gaming value awarded when a gaming medium is won in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning slot 10, an acquisition number display is displayed). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded), If a prize is won in the general winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the prize has been won in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened). If a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 in Good too.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side). The display means is capable of displaying a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the award amount display, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state. An effect is displayed at the same timing as the award amount display (for example, an effect display that moves decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is displayed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display For example, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot may be displayed in a manner suggesting a right-handed hit by moving them toward the back right, the front, and the back left.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

(Explanation regarding the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is notified that the number of prize balls awarded has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are visible from the specific area during the jackpot background image.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the first form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating background technology related to the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the pachinko gaming machine may display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "points 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The number of acquired balls is displayed using numbers for displaying the number of prize balls and characters other than numbers for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The acquired number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) has the word "point" to remind you that it is a acquired number display, and the number "120" to display the number of prize balls. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by lines forming characters, and is an area that does not communicate with areas outside the lines forming characters. Here, ``not communicating with the area outside the lines forming the characters'' means that the ``specific area'' is completely isolated from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters'' by the ``lines forming the characters.'' In other cases, the ``specific area'' is not completely separated by the ``line that forms the character'' from the ``area outside the line that forms the character,'' but it appears to be a separate area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, the characters in which the specific areas are formed will be referred to as "specific characters."

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is a substantially circular region surrounded by curved lines forming the characters. Two specific areas are formed for the Arabic numeral "8". In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by three straight lines forming the character.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The acquisition number display is displayed in a small size in the end area of the display area of the image display device that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during the jackpot. When the jackpot background image changes over time, the line of the jackpot background image may overlap with the back of the winning number display. If a specific character is displayed on the winning number display, the jackpot will appear on the back of the specific area of the specific character, like the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). When the lines of the medium background image overlap, the lines of the jackpot medium background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the "butterfly" in the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of acquisitions. During the jackpot, the ``butterfly'' line in the background image is assimilated with the line forming the specific character ``0,'' making the specific character ``0'' look like the Arabic numeral ``8'' instead of the Arabic numeral ``0''.

In this way, if the characters in the acquired number display are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the jackpot background image so that the line of the jackpot background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH was created in view of this background. The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6" ”, “8”, and “9” specific areas 20SHI1 are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the characters is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, it is sufficient that the color of the specific area 20SHI1 has a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of prize balls and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the number of balls won are shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays an acquired number notification display to notify that fact.

Here, the time saving control and probability change control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state are such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, or the jackpot game state is changed before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and probability changing control may be different for each type of jackpot, or in the case of a specific jackpot type, the number of times of time saving control and probability varying control may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. The accuracy control and time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state until a jackpot occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without intervening the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display to notify that fact. do.

The acquisition number notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is the acquisition number notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), a specific area of a specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is reached, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. Specific characters other than numbers for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(How the number of acquisitions is displayed in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the jackpot is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can be recognized.

In addition to the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 also displays a jackpot display 20SHO to make the user recognize that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, and a jackpot combination derived and displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A decorative pattern display 20SHZ showing the confirmed decorative pattern, a round number display 20SHR showing the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM indicating to the player that he should play right-handed are displayed. has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are also placed in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot, similar to the number of wins display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number display. It may also include characters of a different type from the characters used for the number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters of the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH use "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Further, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In addition, the round number display 20SHR has "numbers" that are the same type of characters as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the characters that are different from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. Furthermore, the right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols" that are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of displaying the number of acquisitions and displaying the number of acquisitions notification.

In this embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A). A second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than 20SH51, is distinguished from each other to perform various displays. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays the background image during the jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4 (A), since "990 points" and the acquired number display 20SHK are displayed, it is easy to recognize that 990 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the grand prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B) to (G). Count up by 1 until "1005". In that case, the number in the acquired number display 20SHK will go through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a round number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000," the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display saying "over 1000," and when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000," ”, a display indicating the number of acquisitions “over 2000” is displayed.

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1000" of Kiriban, the production control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification on the right end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number displayed in each frame of the video while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005," the performance control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move it towards the left edge of the area.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is stopped when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and from that timing, the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of acquisitions has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0" which is a specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

Furthermore, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (D) to (H).

Note that the presentation mode when stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into the frame, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of displaying the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH in the frame, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may pop out from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, or the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may gradually come out. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of the effect of causing the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to go out of frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. It may be an effect such that when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display indicating the number of obtained "over 2000". The acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during the jackpot to be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is not specified. If the jackpot background image is visible from a specific area of the character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but the jackpot background image is made invisible from the specific area of the specific character. This allows specific characters to be recognized accurately. In addition, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display 20SHK, but is displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the winner, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific letters. By doing so, it becomes possible to show even a little of the background image during the jackpot in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the number of winnings notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped from the number of winnings display 20SHK.

Furthermore, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and This includes characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM make the jackpot background image invisible from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, specific characters can be accurately recognized also in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and can frame the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is caused to frame out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the second form of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used in the win number notification display 20SHKH are more specific to the specific area relative to the area of the line forming the characters than the specific characters used in the win number display 20SHK. Portion size proportions are small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Obtainment number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the number of wins. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to pop out to the front. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 expressing the character and an area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D character and the size of the line area forming the 3D character. The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same size. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and the area located on the inner side thereof The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In the example shown in Figure 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison of non-3D characters and 3D characters in modification example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 1.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D characters and the size of the three-dimensional characters forming the 3D characters. The size of the line area 20SH31 representing the character is the same as that of the line area 20SH31. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the area of lines forming the character includes an area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, so the inner outline of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character and the characters on the inner side The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the area 20SHI4 becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character, than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of , and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In modification example 2, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area forming the character. The display is displayed in any one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations.

The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: "red" in the upper region 20SHSU, "orange" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: "orange" in the upper region 20SHSU, "yellow" in the center region 20SHSC, and "green" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: "yellow" in the upper region 20SHSU, "green" in the center region 20SHSC, and "light blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: "green" in the upper region 20SHSU, "light blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: "light blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "purple" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: "blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "purple" in the center region 20SHSC, and "red" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: "purple" in the upper region 20SHSU, "red" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the following order: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format A → ... are changed over time and displayed.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2.

In modification example 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), there are cases when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moved (frame-in). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes is different depending on when the player is out of frame.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display is displayed while moving (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over a period of 0.35 seconds. , changes sequentially from display mode A to display mode D. Thereafter, the acquisition number display changes in order from display mode D to display mode G while being stopped and displayed for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Thereafter, while the acquisition number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over a period of 0.35 seconds, the display mode changes from display mode G to display mode C. Change.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000 pieces", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over". The acquired number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Further, the background image of the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used to display the number of wins. The specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquisition number.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display, but the acquired number display is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the acquired number display is If the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Furthermore, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area representing the character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the acquisition number notification display.

Furthermore, as described above, the background image of the jackpot background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for displaying the winning number notification.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the player when he or she plays the game, and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, it is possible not only to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character even if the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, but also to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character. The production effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible during the jackpot from 20SHI3.

Further, as described above, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display in the first modification are such that the jackpot background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of is small, it is possible not only to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the jackpot background image cannot be seen from a specific area of a specific character, but also to make the jackpot background image invisible from a specific area of a specific character. By doing this, you can prevent characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the characters used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the second modification, the line area forming the characters is displayed in a three-color gradation. The image display device 5 then changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions to display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format. The display changes over time in the order of A→.... Then, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is moving (frame in/frame out), the number of acquisitions notification display changes. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation regarding the third form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko game machine 1 related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used for displaying the result are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used to display results)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used in the result display in the third form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine 1 finishes the round game of the final round, it executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background video. Furthermore, while displaying the ending background video, the image display device 5 displays a result display that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state.

The result display uses numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing that it is a result display. The numbers used for displaying the results are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used for displaying results, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a specific area of a specific character used for displaying a result is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-8, the specific areas 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are transparent. It is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used in the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a result display are also shown in Figure 11. The specific area is displayed in a transparent manner, as shown by the Arabic numeral 8.

(Various performances in jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of performance periods of various performances in the jackpot game state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of various performances in a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an in-retention consecutive game notice indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot gaming state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state with all 10 rounds, the production control CPU 120 will control the performance control CPU 120 after 9 rounds of round games are completed and the final round game as shown in FIGS. At timing T1 when a round game of 10 rounds is started, a pending consecutive game notice is started.

When the on-hold consecutive game notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the round game is in progress in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). During the jackpot, an effect image of the pending consecutive winnings preview will be displayed on the front side of the background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the pending multiplayer preview.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect video cannot be viewed from the specific area. Therefore, in a specific area, the "flame" line in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), at timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 End the series preview and start the ending performance. When the ending effect is started, the ending background image is started to be displayed at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image in which a snowstorm of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen is displayed. Further, in front of the ending background image, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the on-hold series preview before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the ending background image may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. There may be cases where In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the cherry blossom snowstorm displayed as the ending background image is dancing across the screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at timing T3 to start displaying the result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to a value lower than a predetermined brightness. It lowers the brightness to a certain dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the fluttering cherry blossoms have come to rest, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

Note that the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). Further, the result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(E), it is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting based on ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation mode of setting suggestion presentation using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value and to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowflakes fall from cherry blossom trees in full bloom on the left and right sides, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in Figure 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high, the ending background image may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

Furthermore, the ending background video may have different performance modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when it is not the setting value "6". Further, the ending background video may have different effects depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or the setting value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned on-hold consecutive game notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game notice is not executed.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Furthermore, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot game state in accordance with the stored hold information in the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a preview of a pending consecutive play that suggests that the same will be played. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result display on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Further, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive winnings preview from the specific area. On the other hand, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background video and the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive winnings notice, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background video. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, Because it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the preview, if the background video during the jackpot or the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive preview is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and does not overlap with the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive show preview, so the ending background video can be viewed from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it becomes possible to show even a little of the ending background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive game preview is one of a plurality of types of preview presentations for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game preview is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect using the ending background video will be executed, the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is It increases.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than a predetermined brightness, and displays it at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness. Display result display 20SHRE.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH, there is a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probability variable state, and when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the remaining number of times are such that the background image during the ST is not visible from the specific area. The specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display are such that the background image during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic section 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-12 are diagrams illustrating background technology related to the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

Basically, if you compare states that are advantageous to the player, such as variable probability states, time-saving states, jackpot gaming states, etc., and normal states, pachinko gaming machines are more likely to play games in normal states than during periods in which players play games in advantageous states. It is designed to last for a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of reservation information is stored, when the upper limit number of reservation information is not stored. It is easier to execute a shortening variation in which the variable display time is shorter than the above. In the probability variable state with time saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, so winnings are more likely to occur than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period in which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period in which the game is played in the variable probability state with time saving control.

In probability variable control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either of the following conditions is met first: when the special figure game is executed for a predetermined number of STs, or when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot" It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control will end if the predetermined number of ST times of special symbol games are played. . Note that the predetermined number of times ST is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. Time-saving control is performed when either of the following conditions is met first: the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state ends, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not result in a "jackpot" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control will end if the predetermined number of time saving games have been played. . Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

Note that the set value for the number of ST times and the set value for the number of time saving times may be different values.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled in the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the pachinko game machine may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), in response to the fact that the remaining number of ST times is 30, the remaining number of times "30 times remaining" is displayed.

For displaying the remaining number of times, numbers are used to display the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers are used to make it clear that the number of times remaining is displayed. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) has the characters "remaining" and "times" to remind you that it is a remaining number of times display, and "30" to display the remaining number of ST times. The numbers and are used.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, there are specific characters that form specific areas.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to be in a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that the screen appears to be cracked. The background image during ST is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probability change state. The ST background image contains many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not obstruct the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap with the back of the remaining count display. When a specific character is displayed on the remaining count display, ST When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the ST middle background image are assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the ST background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the ST background image line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters indicating the remaining number of times are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH was made in view of this background, and the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the character is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the remaining number of times are displayed are also shown in the diagram. As with the Arabic numerals 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display manner, which is different from the display manner of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times notification in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display that notifies the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a plurality of types with different transmittances, as shown in FIGS. 11-14. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen from the line area.

Further, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 representing the character and an area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode where the background of the characters is transparent, the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, and in the display mode where the background of the characters is not visible, it is displayed as the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. The area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times are displayed. 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display is different depending on whether the remaining number of times notification is displayed in a non-transparent manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the character, the area that represents the character The area surrounded by the inner outline of 20SHS71 and the outline of area 20SHS72A representing the depth of characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, so the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters is displayed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(How the remaining count display appears in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display looks in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image in ST overlaps with the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining count display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the ST middle background image, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays a number of wins display 20SHK, a right-handed hit display 20SHM, and a probability variation display 20SHRU for making it clear that the probability variation state is being controlled. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right hit display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU are also displayed in a small size in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative symbols, similarly to the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the same type of characters are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may also include characters of a different type than those shown in the text. In this embodiment, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH use "numbers", "hiragana", and "kanji" as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variation display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of character from the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers", which are the same type of characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, ``katakana,'' is used. In addition, the right-hand display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters used for the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH, and the remaining count display 20SHST and remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are characters of a different type from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. Similar to the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining count display 20SHST, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU is also in a non-transparent display mode, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters are Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of production operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of displaying the remaining number of times and displaying the remaining number of times notification in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays a remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) and (B), each time the variable display is executed, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number display 20 SHST. and display it.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) and (B), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times is started. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. For example, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the remaining number of times when a variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17(B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display in which the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has elapsed after starting the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the production control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed after changing the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the performance control CPU 120, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of performing variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of ST times may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are provided. The total period including the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, In the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information in at least the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the invisible remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the variable display time is the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. The variable display is set to end before the display result is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, The display result of variable display can be suitably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed to a transparent display mode. Since the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changing, the identification information in the background of the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent manner when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent manner.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a variable probability state with time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 also provides a remaining number of times notification that notifies a predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 60, and the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 50. 50" remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be displayed. The remaining count display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST are such that the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 in the ST background image.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background video during the ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining ST count in a variable probability state, he or she checks the remaining count display 20SHST, but the remaining count display 20SHST is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the ST background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but the ST background image cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, specific characters can be recognized accurately. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is a predetermined number to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number. Since it is displayed only for a limited time and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific character, the first At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a small amount of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, it is possible to avoid unnecessary stress on the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display a remaining number notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of decorative symbols can be made visible when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from decreasing due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a display of the award amount of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., it is possible to display an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, the amount of game value awarded is a predetermined amount. As notification displays to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display will be displayed as "1000 over". (e.g., when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "over 2000"), the award amount display is The notification display is updated every time a gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the number of acquisition display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state), and the notification display is The display is ended when a specific period of time has passed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to end the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, etc.), and the notification is The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used in the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used in the display of the amount of application include the specific characters that form the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display are not visible in the specific area. It is characterized in that the background image is visible from the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time, and large-sized characters are displayed in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, the first display area is It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image at a prominent display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6, 8, 9, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the amount of application and the notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the amount displayed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be able to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area; For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot background image, etc.) , the characters used for the specific display include the same type of characters as the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display, and the characters of a different type from the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display. , all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right hit display 20SHM). The characters include the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. 2 types of characters also include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the specific display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM mean that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area).

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even in the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, (e.g., a second display area 20SH52 narrower than , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the background image is displayed. (For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a display of the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of prize balls acquired), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; The displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban"). When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", it is possible to display a win number notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. (For example, the display notifying the number of acquisitions ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display.) The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions), and the amount displayed and The characters used in the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include lines forming the characters). (e.g., a specific area surrounded by The specific characters used for the notification display are more similar to the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the award amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area is small (for example, the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions) than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. (e.g., the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area is small).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area for expressing characters and an area for expressing the depth of the characters.

According to such a configuration, the presentation effect of the notification display can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the jackpot may be visible from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the award amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period to bless people, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the lines forming the characters. Since the background image is small, it is possible to not only reduce the risk of misrecognizing the characters even if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also increase the production effect by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, in the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific characters used may be such that the background image is not visible during the jackpot from the specific area 20SHI4, etc.).

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the proportion of the size of the character is small, it is possible to not only suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character. This can prevent misunderstandings.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means is capable of changing the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 displays the number of acquired (such as that the notification display 20SHKH can be displayed by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51), and when the specific period has elapsed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change the mode to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into frame to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is made to frame out) etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line area forming the characters (for example, a modification example regarding the second form of the characteristic part 20SH). The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in 2 are displayed in a gradation of three colors in the line area forming the characters, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character format used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the following manner: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display mode G→display mode A→..., etc.), when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode, and when it is displayed in a different mode from the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of colors changes differs depending on when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (for example, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is The display mode of the acquisition number notification display may change at a different speed depending on when the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out), etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state where the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device The display area of No. 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is , in the first display area and the second display area, a background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). , a background image during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation number display regarding the number of variations in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device 5 is that in the second display area 20SH52, a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state can be displayed on the front side of the ST background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, A frequency notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify the number of fluctuations when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of changes when the value of the number of changes display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first number of times notification display). 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during ST, a remaining number display 20SHST is displayed as a remaining number display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``60'' when the number of remaining times shown by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``50'' when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times shown by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50 times. ), and the variable number display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). , the number of times notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends displaying when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying). The characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the number of fluctuations display (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are the same as those used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST). The characters used for the variable number display and the number notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the variable number display include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc. The background video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background video is not visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI6), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are is characterized in that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH indicate that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the variation count display and the count notification display including the specific character in relation to the background image. For example, when checking the number of fluctuations in a special state, the player checks the fluctuation number display, but the fluctuation number display is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from a specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not displayed all the time like the fluctuating number of times display, but is displayed only during a specific period to alert players that the remaining number of times indicated by the fluctuating number of times display will reach a predetermined number of times. Since the characters are displayed in large size in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (12) above, the display means is capable of displaying the characters used for the number of times notification display in a transparent manner in which an image on the back side can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line part forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible when the number of times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine according to (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is displayed variably (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", In the variable display area, the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information (for example, , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be made visible while the number of times notification display is being displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 If the display result is derived and displayed, display it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while displaying the number of times notification display, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value that has been provided (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls awarded), and displaying the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area where the award amount display is displayed (for example, an image display The device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from decreasing due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is configured to display information indicating that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a first background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and second display area 20SH52. (for example, the image display device 5 can display a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state at least in the first display area). In the first display area 20SH51, it is possible to display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display a specific suggestion image in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background image is not displayed). , on the front side of the jackpot background image, it is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a pending consecutive game preview indicating that the jackpot game state will be controlled in accordance with the stored pending information, etc.), In the second display area, in the front side of the first background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image during a jackpot), when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, On the front side of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that informs the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display a result notification display when the ending background image is displayed). (e.g., it is possible to display a result display 20SHRE that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE). The characters used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed, etc.), and the specific character used for the display of the amount of application is determined from the specific area to the first background image and the previous period. The specific suggestion video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview are not visible from the specific area, etc.) The specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area 20SHI5). (e.g.).

According to such a configuration, the provision amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background video and the specific suggestion video, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the second background video. can be suitably displayed in relation to For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area, and the amount displayed is Since it may overlap with the suggested image, if the first background image or specific suggested image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character. By making the jackpot background image and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It becomes possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the prominent display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability (such as being able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means. The second background video can be displayed in a manner that suggests the set value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion video is This is an aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion videos that make suggestions regarding the advantageous state, and do not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview predicts the reliability of the jackpot). Although this is one of multiple types of preview effects, setting suggestion effects based on pending continuous play notices should not be executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so the significance of the second background image being visible from the specific area of the specific character used for displaying the result notification. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image at a predetermined brightness). (such as starting display of an image), at the timing of starting display of the result notification display, the second background image is temporarily stopped and displayed at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and Display the result notification display at a brightness that is brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background video at a specific brightness that is lower than a predetermined brightness at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE) and displaying the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 19SH will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH displays the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot gaming state, and the number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to display the expected number of balls to be acquired regarding the total number of balls awarded. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of wins invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected number of acquisitions display when the display of the expected number of acquisitions becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the display of the expected number of wins becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 19SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Production operation when a winning occurs during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation when a winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12-2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions as 20SHK when the jackpot game state is controlled, and the game ball is placed in the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state. An acquired number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded by entering the game, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by the middle bracket "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator is "135/1500". It is displayed in the format of a fraction, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 having "1500" in the denominator. That is, the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 12-1(A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state is 135 balls, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 135 balls. This shows that the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded is 1,500.

Also in this embodiment, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the second display area 20SH52 includes a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and a round number display 20SHR. , the right-handed indication 20SHM is also displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during the jackpot is displayed on a display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer where the winning number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the big prize opening in the jackpot game state, first, as shown in FIG. The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display has started at the lower right end of the display area is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When this happens, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been noticed has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-win occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game, the big winning hole is closed. A so-called over-win may occur in which the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of wins display 20SHK according to the performance mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first forms a big winning opening, as shown in FIGS. The effect display starts to be displayed in the display area near the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which has started displaying at the lower right end of the display area, is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect display 20SHEF to display the number of acquisitions 20SHK before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. To start an over-winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning before it becomes invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as an over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-winning sound different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-winning effect. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound of "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the sound at the time of normal winning as an over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-4(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to view.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in Figures 12-3 (D) to (E) and Figures 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display is The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. You can confirm that.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. By updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number is When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably make the user recognize that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-win occurs, not only the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 but also the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, so the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state is It is possible to suitably make the player recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls received.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (G), the display of the over winning effect video that was being displayed on the image display device 5 as an over winning effect has ended, and a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is now displayed.

(Suggestion of setting based on over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the setting value, and to be able to execute the above-mentioned over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set to high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound "Peep-Paw" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that the setting suggestion effect based on the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, an over winning effect as shown in Figure 12-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set high In addition, an over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over winning performance may have different performance modes depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Further, the over winning effect may have different effects depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

(If there is a round in which the specified number of prizes was not won and a round in which over-wins occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

As mentioned above, the open state of the jackpot game state continues until the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot hole reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500 balls, but since over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games, the final The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, if there is a round in which the predetermined number of winnings is not won and a round in which over-winning occurs, the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the expected number of winnings display 20SHK2. By checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there was a round in which the predetermined number of prizes was not won, and that there was a round in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display 20SHEF becomes invisible or difficult. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 has not been updated and remains at "1500".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes are not won and a round in which over-wins occur, a sense of incongruity is prevented from occurring due to the values of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2. be able to.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot game state. . Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a performance control CPU 120 that can execute an over winning performance when an over winning performance occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. A scheduled number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-win occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, the user feels more uncomfortable than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using the image display device 5 and a performance using the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the over winning performance.

Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a game ball has entered the special variable prize winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, attention can also be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Furthermore, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to recognize in advance that an over-win has occurred by executing the over-win presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over-winning presentation.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning presentation continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the update of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example regarding characteristic part 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding error detection codes and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for playing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage, the CPU 103 will be able to resume the game played before the power outage after the power outage is restored by executing the power supply outage process. Can be continued.

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the performance. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 cannot continue the performance based on the information on the game before the power outage after the power outage is restored.

For example, if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like during a round game, the effect control CPU 120 will not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the production control CPU 120 may display the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage has been restored, or display specific information such as "????/????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a winning occurs in the round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 is not executing the performance corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-win has occurred in one round of the round game after the power outage has been restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the over-win performance using the image display device 5, but will use the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to perform an over winning effect using the attacker lamp 9c. Note that the production control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by using a production control command that notifies the player of an over-win.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed, so that a feeling of discomfort does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-win occurs, it can be notified to that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable state that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize), control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko machine); The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when controlled to be in a jackpot game state, etc.) , a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when more than a predetermined number of game media win the variable prize winning means in the first round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first round game); (e.g., comprising a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win performance when an over-win performance occurs), and the display means is configured to display a prize that is awarded when the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means. It is possible to display a first award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value and a second award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value scheduled to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when more game media than the predetermined number win a prize in the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs, and the second award amount display is made visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display (for example, when the expected acquisition amount display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) before the second grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display. The CPU 120 is characterized by starting the over-winning presentation before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the second application amount display is updated, a feeling of discomfort occurs when the value of the second application amount display is updated, compared to when the value of the second application amount display is updated while the second application amount display is made visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes an audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect as the specific effect. It is possible to perform a performance by the display means and a performance by the audio output means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance by the image display device 5 and a performance by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance). be feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the performance effect of the specific performance can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means when the game medium enters the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 shows that the game ball has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7). At this time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area near the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to express the fact that a game ball has entered the variable prize winning means through a display effect on the display means, and it is possible to improve interest. Moreover, since not only the second application amount display but also the first application amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed when the effect display 20SHEF is moved. (for example, when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display automatically come into view. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, attention can also be drawn to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the specific performance execution means is configured to perform Start a specific performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more than a predetermined number of game media have been won by the variable winning means by executing the specific performance, so that the second award amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, and the specific performance execution means is configured to The specific effect can be executed in a manner that suggests the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of executing the over winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value set). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific performance.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific performance execution means ends the specific performance after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the effect display 20SHEF to After the competition ends, the over-winning performance must be ended, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display becomes visible while the specific performance continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the second grant amount display being updated can be avoided. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Other examples of transition to time saving state)
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time-saving state is exemplified in such a manner that the transition to the time-saving state is made through a jackpot state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a special random number or another random number, the timing when winning a prize in the starting opening is good.

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers are used, the winning value will be the lottery result using the special random numbers, and if small-hit pattern random numbers are used for time-saving symbols, the winning value will be the specific small-winning symbol. When a random number is used as a winning value and a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time-saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure and when the small winning symbol uses the time-saving symbols together, the variable display count of the time-saving state is made not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving region is passed.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. Incidentally, the time saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time saving state or the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number value is used for the lottery. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, whether the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not drawn may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbols, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbols can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot, it is in a high probability low base state when the gaming hall opens, and the high probability low base state is displayed for a specified number of times. After the variable display has been executed and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and has a display. means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, which is the first display area). a second display area 20SH52 narrower than 20SH51), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area ( For example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and in the second display area, the background image can be displayed. On the front side, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 displays the award ball awarded on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of acquisitions), at least in the first display area, a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount. , a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, a notification that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban"). As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display ``over 1000'', and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. (e.g., when the number of awarded balls reached ``2000'', it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying ``over 2000''), and the award amount display is such that a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state. (For example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated every time a specific period of time has passed since the start of display. (For example, the acquisition amount notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display.) (For example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK.) And the characters used in the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include the characters (e.g., a specific area surrounded by a line to be formed includes a specific character), and the specific character used to display the amount of provision is such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the number of acquired The specific characters used in the display 20SHK indicate that the background image is not visible from a specific area (for example, the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the specific letters used for the notification display indicate that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the background image is not visible from the specific area). The specific characters used in the number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background image is visible from a specific area, etc.)
The display means is capable of displaying the notification display when displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display when displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK). displaying 20SHKH, etc.),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means is capable of executing effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table corresponding to the specified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. An example of this is a gaming machine (a part that can determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed).

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Furthermore, since an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive gaming value is awarded in a short period of time when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. It is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high due to the numeric value data being set, and to perform performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In other words, the background image is not visible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used to display the amount of application, and the characters in the specific area Since the background image is visible from the background image, the dispensed amount can be displayed in small fonts, making it easy to check at all times, while the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large fonts without hiding the background image. When an adjustment that reduces the speed of awarding game value (for example, an adjustment that makes the variable display time longer than when the speed of awarding game value is not reduced in variable pattern selection) is performed, a performance that corresponds to the adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest while preventing excessive gaming value from being provided in a short period of time. In other words, to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, allows players to easily grasp the amount of gaming value provided, makes it easy to recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached, and has an appropriate gambling quality that easily attracts players' interest. I can do it.

Further, the amount display and the adjusting means may be associated with each other. For example, the display mode of the application amount display may be changed depending on whether or not the application speed has been reduced by the adjusting means. In this case, it is preferable to make the speed recognizable by changing the color of the applied amount display or by changing the display size.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, it is possible to control the gaming machine to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and to control the gaming machine to a normal state and the more advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is easily controlled by
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed), and a gaming machine. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it also has a normal state and a special state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state, etc.). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a low-accuracy, high-base state)),
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In some cases, the CPU 103 adjusts the speed at which the gaming value is awarded during the unit period to decrease (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21, the CPU 103 A part for lengthening the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the status flag value to "1" or "2",
The updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when an end condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that sets the ball release state flag to "0" based on the same set variable display remaining number after judgment becoming 0 when it is set to "1"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed of awarding gaming value, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the addition of gaming value.

The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment,
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot),
The adjusting means is arranged such that a variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is a variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in Figure 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2" (the first high ball output state or the second When the ball output status flag is in a high ball output state), the special figure variable display time in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output status flag is "0" (when the ball output status is low). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the variable display period, the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, The speed at which game values are awarded can be reduced without reducing the game value that is awarded in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment,
The advantageous state includes a grantable period during which gaming value can be granted (for example, the period of each round game in which the grand prize opening is open as shown in Figure 14-20) and a granting period during which gaming value cannot be granted. Including the disabled period (for example, as shown in Figure 14-20, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period when the grand prize opening is closed),
The adjusting means is configured to adjust the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, to the advantageous state, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball dispensing state flag is (The part where the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending period during jackpot games are set longer than when it is "0"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the non-granting period in which no gaming value is awarded, it is possible to reduce the speed at which gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments,
Whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, variable probability jackpot B) or a second advantageous state in which the amount of gaming value awarded is greater than the first advantageous state (for example, variable probability jackpot A). (For example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process (step 162 SGS 154) for determining the jackpot type in the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 14-16) capable of determining the advantageous state type determining means,
The adjustment means is configured to adjust the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value to be such that the predetermined numerical data is the first value. In some cases, the first advantageous state is adjusted to be higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in Modification 162SG-1, the ball output state is a high ball output state). In this case, the part that lowers the determination rate of variable probability jackpot A and increases the determination rate of variable probability jackpot B as a jackpot type than when the ball output state is low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it becomes easier to determine the first advantageous state in which the size of the game value awarded is small. Since it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the gaming value awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments,
The adjusting means is configured to adjust the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value to be the first value when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-2, the percentage of jackpots is higher in a high ball output state than in a low ball output state.) (a part that increases the rate of determining the type as non-probable variable jackpot, a part that increases the rate of winning a falling lottery in a high ball state than in a low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it becomes easier to determine the end of the advantageous period and control to the normal state, so that successive advantageous conditions occur through the special condition. Since the number of times can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the speed at which game values are awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments, and includes:
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that has occurred during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached the number of termination determination times. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-3, the first high ball output state is The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball state to a low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment can be ended when an advantageous state of the number of times of termination determination occurs in an advantageous period.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments,
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot),
The termination condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached the number of termination determinations (for example, after the determination The value set as the remaining number of variable displays, ``100,'' becomes ``0'' after executing the variable display 100 times.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the variable display of the number of completion determinations is performed after the predetermined numerical data has been updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of embodiment 8 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the gaming value used in the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached a magnitude for determination of termination. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1", the game ball that entered each winning slot or the out slot during the consecutive winning state (a part that sets the value of the ball release state flag to "0" based on the total number of entered game balls reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment is finished when the magnitude of the gaming value used in the game reaches the magnitude of the end determination. can do.

The gaming machine of embodiment 9 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 8,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means that initializes the storage contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 When executing the game control main process shown in FIG.
Equipped with
When the storage contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the CPU 103 (The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball output state is set as the value of the ball output state flag in the process),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of embodiment 10 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 9,
comprising a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 - When executing the game control main process shown in 11, if the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), execute the recovery process (step S4) including the process of updating the ball output state flag using backup data. , if the ball was in a high ball payout state when the power outage occurred, it will be restored to the high ball payout state, and if it was in the low ball payout state when the power outage occurred, it will be restored to the low ball payout state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of power outage is the second value, adjustment can be continued when power outage is restored.

The gaming machine of embodiment 11 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 10,
Notification means that can notify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. After setting the value to "1", the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting in the process of step 162SG08).
It is characterized by
It can be recognized that the adjustment has been made because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting parts whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the high ball status notification LED 162SG071). and,
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, the part that notifies the high ball state by lighting the high ball state notification LED 162SG071),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, notification can be performed by the game control means through light emission control common to other light emitting parts.

The gaming machine of embodiment 13 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 12,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of embodiment 14 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 13,
A performance that can execute a specific performance that can suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach performance) and a preview performance that foretells the execution of the specific performance (for example, a pre-read preview performance) Equipped with execution means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
The effect executing means limits execution of the preview effect during a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, in FIG. As shown in 23, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the limit number of pre-reading in the process of step 162SGS242b of the pre-read preview setting process, and determines whether the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the pre-read limit number. If it is less than the pre-reading limit number of times (step 162SGS242b; Y), the pre-reading preview performance is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the preview performance from becoming inappropriate due to adjustment not being executed due to the predetermined numerical data being updated from the second value to the first value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 109SG)
Next, the feature section 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

Conventional gaming machines, such as those described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), are capable of notifying performance results by the movement of a movable body (execution of a specific performance), and are capable of outputting performance sounds. Some devices are equipped with speakers (sound output means).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly moving a movable body in a period before executing the specific effect, and A conceivable method is to make the player pay attention to whether or not a specific performance will be executed by executing the performance. Furthermore, such a gaming machine can finish the repetitive motion of the movable body as a suggestive effect a predetermined period before the specific effect, and change the types of effect sounds output from the speaker before and after the predetermined period ( It may be possible to improve the game's interest by changing the type of sound output from the speakers, but it is possible that the types of sound output from the speakers may change before and after the predetermined period. There is a problem in that recognition becomes difficult due to the movement of the movable body.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG. As shown in FIG. 13-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 109S, a movable unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410, as shown in FIG. 13-3(A). A first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, and a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction. A third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. For this reason, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this feature section 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Furthermore, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5, by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 13-3(A)), the suggested position is above the retreat position (see FIG. 13-3(B)), and the effect is above the suggested position and is also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to any position (see Figure 13-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the retracted position (FIG. 13 13-3(A)) to a position close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (see FIG. 13-3(C)) which has moved to the production position.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-3(A) to 13-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable unit 109SG400 is that the first movable body 109SG401 is in the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are in the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position, and the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right adjacent positions is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 13-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 109SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 13-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates the predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 13-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 13-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 13-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 13-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 109SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 109SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 13-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 13-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 109SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 109SG using FIG. 13-7(B), in this feature section 109SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Also, although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 13-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 13-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 109SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern in this feature section 109SG includes a special winning fluctuation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Super Reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (Super Reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern) Determine from.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, while PB1-2, PB1 -3, the numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-4 and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are judged for PB1-1, 45 pieces are judged for PB1-2, 150 pieces are judged for PB1-3, 300 pieces are judged for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are judged for PB1-5. A value is assigned to each. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, there are 2 judgment values for PB1-1, 30 judgment values for PB1-2, 135 judgment values for PB1-3, 315 judgment values for PB1-4, and 515 judgment values for PB1-5. assigned to each. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. or PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, the variable display is performed using the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 error variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviance), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α1 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this feature section 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between an ally character A and an enemy character A as a super reach performance. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, as for the jackpot expectation of each variable display in this characteristic section 109SG, the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is set to be the highest, and henceforth, super reach β1, super reach α2 , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set to have higher jackpot expectations (Jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature section 109SG: Super Reach β2 > Super Reach β1 > Super Reach α2 > Super Reach α1 >Normal Reach > Non-Reach).

In other words, if we pay attention to the variable display of Super Reach, this feature section 109SG can determine whether the ally character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of Super Reach) is ally character A or ally character B. The expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 109SG includes a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 109SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 13-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 109SG191, a production control timer setting section 109SG192, a production control counter setting section 109SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 109SG194. We are prepared.

The effect control flag setting section 109SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 109SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 13-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the feature section 109SG, a pending display flag is set to a flag value according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that data can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning hole, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 13-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the main feature section 109SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 5 will be explained based on FIGS. 13-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (Step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 109SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 109SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 109 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 13-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 13-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 13-12) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 109 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 109SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 109SGS128). 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table D is a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, in addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, there is also a fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 13-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern judgment table A for a loss, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the possible ranges of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Proceed to 109SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 109SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIGS. 13-14 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 13-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 109SGS224 is a second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (109SGS228; Y), and in step 109SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the free space in the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characteristic unit 162SGS234, if the received command is the first ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is a low ball output state, and the value of the ball output state flag for production is set to "0". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the second ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state and the value of the production ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated), and if the received command is the third ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the second high ball output state and the value of the production ball output state flag is set to "2". Set (update) to .

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which storage is performed sequentially from the beginning of the free area of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the reception command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to store the number of pending storage notification commands. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

FIG. 13-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 13-15, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and if there is a pending memory (entry) for which the pending display flag is not set, It is determined whether or not there is one (step 109 SGS 242a). If there is no pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is any pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

In addition, whether or not the super reach reach effect is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether the variable display is being executed or not) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by referring to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and if the super reach reach effect is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a loss or a jackpot. If it is a symbol designation command (Step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a loss) (Step 109SGS243b) .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (pre-announcement type) are determined at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 13-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 13-16, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) is varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the ratio of display pattern β being determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio of display pattern α being determined. It is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot is increased, and the player's expectations for a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern α or the white star in which the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) is always decided to execute the pre-read preview effect. Although one of the display patterns β in which the shape (☆) is displayed is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable Similarly to the case where the display result is "miss", a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview performance.

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 109SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice performance determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice performance (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 13-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-16, the determination ratio of the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) is varied depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview effect is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in Figure 13-16, if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-conformity". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than in the case of ``Reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect when the variable display result is "miss", if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variable pattern category when the variable display result is “miss”.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)", "miss (super reach)", or "miss (other)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probable jackpot)" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable variable jackpot". This increases the player's expectations.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance was determined in step 109SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After executing step 109SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending storage display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, in step 109SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250) and proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, as described above, even when the reach effect of Super Reach is being executed (Step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (Step 109SGS243a), the entry After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A are changed according to the stored contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A in FIG. 13-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-17, if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in Figure 13-17. , when the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆" will be displayed at In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D.

Moreover, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 13-17, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will be the pending display of the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "○", and the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "☆" in the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. Is displayed. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 13-17, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (the screen (towards the center).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory are It will now be displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U.

Note that although this characteristic section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 109SG005D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 109SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new command at the time of starting winning is stored in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 109SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the reserved memory for the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the reserved memory for the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 13-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is set to ``1-0'' to ``1-4''. Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", It is determined from among the combinations of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999", etc. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command; however, the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Also, a first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the first time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 stores the image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including the image data that indicates the display state of the decorative pattern on the left center right, into the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 13-20).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. Take control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 13-20).

After executing step 109SGS288, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process ends (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 13-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). Further, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

In addition, after executing step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process advances to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

Note that if the variable display is not a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i are executed. The process proceeds to step 109SGS310 without any processing.

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during the variable display including the left-center right decorative pattern. The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapsed time is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (video display control) are realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each production device during the ready-to-reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the feature section 109SG will be explained. The presentation mode of the variable display will be explained based on FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24.

First, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 starts, the first enlarged display period , the character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (for the reach effect of super reach α1, the ally character A and the enemy character A, and for the reach effect of super reach α2) If so, an enlarged display of friendly character A and enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 in the third enlarged display period. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. .

Note that in this feature section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. is the smallest. That is, in this feature section 109SG, regarding the enlargement speed of the character image, the enlargement speed during the first enlarged display period is set to be the fastest, and the enlargement speed during the third enlarged display period is set to be the slowest (enlargement speed of character image: (first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). Note that in the feature section 109SG, "the enlargement speed is fast" means that the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large.

Thereafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period that combines the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed) is set as period T2, and the third enlarged display period and the character image The period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-21, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retreat position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-22, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the failure notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. Regarding these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period, and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body movement suggestion effect A and movable body movement effect A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body is A movable body motion suggestion production A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the above-mentioned movable body movement effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 over a period T4. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5. Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body motion representation A in the main feature section 109SG is also a representation in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body motion suggestion representation A.

Furthermore, during the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 also emits light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the movable LED 109SG495 is activated during the period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and during the period T3 (more precisely, during the period T3). The movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1 over a period T4.

Also, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: BGM of music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound. The type of sound that is output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the BGM is the effect sound that is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win performance is performed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, like BGM, SE (sound effect) is a production sound that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the output of SE in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the entire ready-to-win performance.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body motion suggestion production A. In other words, the motion suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body motion suggestion performance A, and is not output during other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body movement effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only during the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion performance A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output during other periods.

As shown in Figures 13-23 and 13-24, regarding the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period, The character images displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach effect of super reach β1, and character images displayed in the reach effect of super reach β2) Enlarged display of friendly character B and enemy character B) is executed.

From now on, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emission mode of the movable body LED109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in Figure 13- Since this is the same mode as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2 shown in FIGS. 21 and 13-22, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 13-23, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display will be displayed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions close to the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retracted positions. A movable body motion effect B is executed to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-24, during the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable body performance B is a performance that is executed over a period T4, like the above-mentioned movable body performance A and the failure notification performance.

Also, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-24, over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period), A movable body motion suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retreat position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the motion suggestion performance is executed, the movable body motion suggestion performance is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Further, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-26(A), when comparing movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B, movable body motion suggestion performance A shows a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S acts repeatedly on the first movable body 109SG401 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself The difference is that the movable body motion suggestion performance B does not move, whereas the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retreat position and the suggested position. On the other hand, movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26(B), when comparing movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B, movable body motion performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the production position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. Movable body movement performance B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position. This is an effect of moving the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state, and the display in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are spread from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 is not executed. This is different from movable body motion performance A. Furthermore, movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 will be explained based on FIGS. 13-27 to 13-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 13-27(A) and 13-27(B), after a while after the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 is started, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time further passes in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started as a reach performance (Figure 13-27 (C ) and FIG. 13-28 (A)), and if the variable display is that of super reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see FIGS. 13-27 (D) and (See Figure 13-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach performance (see Figures 13-27 (E) and 13 -32 (A)), if the variable display is that of super reach β2, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 13-27 (F) and Figure 13- 34(A)).

In addition, at the start of these super reach reach performances, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The ornamental symbols that have been displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" ornamental symbols are temporarily rendered invisible.

As shown in Figures 13-28 (A) and 13-28 (B), when reaching the second half of the battle performance that is the reach performance of Super Reach α1, as shown in Figure 13-28 (C), allies Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-28(C) to 13-28(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character A and enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-28(D) to 13-28(F)), the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed first on the image display device 5. It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 13-28 (A) to 13-28 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character A, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) of a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S moving toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-28(E) to 13-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Display at. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (H) and FIG. 13-29 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edges of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-29 (J) and 13-29 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-30 (A) and 13-30 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as a reach performance of Super Reach α2, as shown in Figure 13-30 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-30(C) to 13-30(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character A and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-30(D) to 13-30(F)), the images of friendly character A and enemy character B are It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character B, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (G) to FIG. 13-31 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-31 (J) and 13-31 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-32 (A) and 13-32 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β1, as shown in Figure 13-32 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character B attacks enemy character A begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-32(C) to 13-32(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-32(D) and 13-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-33 (G) to FIG. 13-33 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, ally character B and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-33 (J) and 13-33 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-34 (A) and 13-34 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β2, as shown in Figure 13-34 (C). , the display of a moving image in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-34(C) to 13-34(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-34 (D) and 13-34 (E), during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 13-35 (G) to 13-35 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, the ally character B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-35 (J) and 13-35 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, as shown in 10-31 to 13-35. On the other hand, while the movable body movement effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the image of the friendly character or enemy character during the reach effect is enlarged by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B. Since the performance of the movable body motion performance B by the display and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, since the speed of enlarging each character's image is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the production effect during the enlarged display period can be improved. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body movement performance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the second enlarged display period has a slower enlargement speed than the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect ends. Since the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the friendly character and the enemy character continues even after the movable body motion suggestion performance ends, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, although the mode in which the enlargement speed in the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest. The expansion speed in the third expansion display period may be the fastest, the expansion speed in the first expansion display period may be the slowest, or the expansion speed in the second expansion display period may be the fastest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. This can prevent the attention of people from decreasing. Note that although this feature section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the execution of the pre-read notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The period during which execution of the performance is limited may be only a part of the reach performance (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, in this feature section 109SG, as a form of restricting the execution of the pre-read preview effect, a mode in which the pre-read preview effect is not executed during the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the reach effect, the advance notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than in other periods.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 and 13-34, the player can visually confirm the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. 13-33 and 13-35, In addition, during the execution of the movable body action effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the reach effect. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect performance images (images of ally characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the operating status of the first movable body 109SG401, so the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 changes as a movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether the motion is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion effect, and the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-23, while the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed, BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion performance is being executed. During the game, BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, so they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. To make it easier for a player to recognize that the performance sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Yes, the period T3 is a shorter period than the period T2 in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed, so the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion production is the same as the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion production. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the moving body motion is the same, and also to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance being longer than the execution period of the movable body motion production in the suggested reach performance. It is also possible to prevent the decline.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body movement performance or the failure notification performance, the movable body LED 109SG495 During the period in which the light is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 and 13-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 13-33 and 13-35, the movable body In motion production B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated, so it is difficult to determine whether the motion of the movable body is a motion suggesting a movable body motion or not. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between motions and motions.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, in the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1, and the movable body movement is produced. During execution, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1, so the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body movement performance is being executed. It is also possible to improve the game's interest during execution of the movable body movement performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, while the moving body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, the effect image of the reach effect is displayed. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-29 and 13-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed V2 which is higher than the speed V1 on the image display device 5. Since the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion production A, and also to By moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, so that the production effect of the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced, which increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 (F) and 13-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the performance to be executed from now on is a movable body movement performance or a failure notification performance.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , exemplifies a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the reach effect production image (images of the friendly character and enemy character) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance is set to a timing earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion production is performed. can increase the attention of players.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period and the display state of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be changed by displaying an image or an effect image. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, the feature section 109SG has a form that allows the image display device 5 to display an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in Modification Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays images according to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, which is executed as a reach performance. It may also be possible to display an effect image.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production, The size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance may be made different. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size that corresponds to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B that corresponds to the movement of the movable body and an effect image that corresponds to the progress of the battle production, the explosion effect that corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency may be made different between the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

Further, in the characteristic section 109SG, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion production and enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion production or failure notification production. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and the enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed. During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state that is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters. You may let them. Furthermore, when performing a movable body movement effect (when the variable display result is a jackpot), by changing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, which is even lower, The visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters may be further reduced. By doing this, after the enlarged display period ends, the visibility of the friendly characters and enemy characters on the image display device 5 decreases, so that the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended. When performing the movable body effect, it is possible to increase attention to the operations of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, when a movable body movement performance is being executed, Different effect images may be displayed on the image display device 5. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is determined from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body movement suggestion effect. You can also increase the number. By doing this, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggesting effect is being executed, and therefore it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the movable body movement suggesting effect is being executed. .

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance, while the movable body motion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance. As the image corresponding to the body motion effect, an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and images compatible with movable body movement effects, the display period of images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and the display period of images compatible with movable body movement effects may be set. It may be different. By doing this, the images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance and the images corresponding to the movable body motion performance It becomes possible to display the display at an appropriate period corresponding to whether it is the execution of a movable body motion effect or the execution of a movable body motion effect.

Furthermore, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion effects on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image compatible with movable body motion effects may be reduced by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing this, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body motion performance rather than the image corresponding to the movable body motion performance.

Further, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion suggestion performance on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is output from the speaker 8L8R, and at the same time, the image display device 5 When displaying an image compatible with movable body movement effects in , the speaker 8L8R may output a sound corresponding to the movable body movement effects corresponding to the image compatible with movable body movement effects. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when performing the movable body motion suggestion production and when performing the movable body motion production. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is in progress.

Furthermore, when performing a movable body motion performance during the reach performance (when the variable display result becomes a jackpot), the movable body motion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion performance. Display of an image corresponding to body movement performance may be started. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the start of the movable body motion performance during the reach performance of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, in the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which the display is displayed moving at the speed V1 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as movable body motion suggestion production A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is set to the first movable body 109SG401. The speed V1 is changed to a low speed as the speed V1 approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion production A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing this, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (velocity V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG outputs 1 action suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation, and outputs 1 jackpot notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation. Although the form in which sound is output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation can be performed at any of the timings. It may be possible to output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound is started. By doing this, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also Since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, the game's interest can be improved.

In particular, when determining the output timing of the motion suggestion sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, when determining the output timing of the jackpot notification sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG moves the first movable body 109SG401 at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24. Although the embodiment is illustrated in which the first movable body 109SG401 is moved back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position, the present invention is not limited to this. , the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retreated position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retreated position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the retreat position until the movable body motion performance or the deviation notification performance is started. The present invention is not limited to this, but after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion performance or miss notification performance is started. Good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the execution of the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion production and the execution of the movable body motion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is made different between when the movable body motion suggestion production is executed and when the movable body motion production is executed. Good too.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-20, the characteristic section 109SG also controls updating of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, and controls movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) based on control timers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable body In addition to the movement control, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1, the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In addition, when performing update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, movement control of the movable body, lighting control of the LED, and output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, the effect control image is updated every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (executes S73 to S77 of the production control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), updates the production image every 33 ms, controls the movement of the movable body every 1 ms, and controls the LED. The lighting control may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, motor 109SG422 for the third movable body, Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound can be suitably executed.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be changed depending on the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes are provided for the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S to be displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion production A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in any of the modes as the movable body motion suggestion production A. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled may be varied depending on the situation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-25, the characteristic section 109SG displays a reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion effect) during the third enlarged display period. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is also performed during the third enlarged display period. You may set up a case. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 can reciprocate between the retracted position and the suggested position during the third enlarged display period. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the display period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retreat position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution of movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B is suggested by repeatedly moving (movable body motion suggestion performance B), the present invention is not limited to this; Execution of the movable body movement effect A or the movable body movement effect B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of the image or the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the feature section 109SG, the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion is determined by lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may also suggest that performance B be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is used as a movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in a reduced state (see FIGS. 13-28 (D) and 13-30 (D)), the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before lowering the contrast between the image of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-28(C) The display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from the timing shown in FIG. 13-30(C).

Note that when starting to display the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a timing before lowering the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 in this way, By increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, friendly character A and enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-29(G), an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed; Although a part of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion becomes invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image may be displayed when the moving body movement effect is executed. It is also possible to display the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to movable body movement effects in the entire display area of the device 5, and make all other effect images invisible.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body motion performance is executed during the reach performance of Super Reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing to execute the movable body motion performance may be It may be performed at a timing other than during the reach performance of Super Reach. For example, as modification example 109SG-8, the combinations of decorative patterns are It may be possible to perform the movable body motion performance during the period from when the reach is reached until the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 13-36(B), the moving body movement suggestion effect is started after reaching the reach, and the image display device 5 displays the reach effect to be executed after this with high expectations (jackpot). (for example, reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) and low expectation level (big hit game state) Which of the reach performances (for example, reach performances with lower expectations than the reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) As a branching effect that displays an image of a character with its eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether to branch to a branch, as shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 13-37(C) to 13-37(E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character there opening its eyes. In other words, in this branching effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 may go dark without opening its eyes, so that a reach effect with high expectations will not be executed (a reach effect with low expectations will be executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), a low-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with high expectations, the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 13-37(F) to 13-37(H). By opening the eyes of the character who is playing the game, it is announced that a highly anticipated reach effect will be executed. Moreover, at this time, a movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion performance and the branch performance are completed, a highly anticipated reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body motion performance may be executed as a performance to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as exemplified in the feature section 109SG, but it may also be performed as a performance to notify that a highly expected reach performance will be executed. It may be performed as a performance (a performance that notifies that the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 13-36(B) and 13-37(C), the character with its eyes closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character whose eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect, the image display device 5 At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the feature section 109SG, the present invention is applied as a branch for determining whether or not the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the reach effect of Super Reach, but in this modification example 109SG-8. As shown, the present invention may be applied to determine which of the low-expected ready-to-reach effects and high-expected ready-to-reach effects are executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is an image of the character (the first specific image is an image of the character with its eyes closed, the second specific image is an image of the character with its eyes open), the effect image in the present invention corresponds to the above-mentioned image of concentrated lines, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-36 and 13-37, in this modification example 109SG-8, when performing the movable body movement performance as a performance to notify that a highly anticipated reach performance will be executed, Although a form in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed before the execution of the movable body motion performance is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion performance may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion performance may be different between when the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body motion suggestion performance is not performed (the rate at which the highly expected ready-to-reach performance is executed is different). (Explanation regarding characteristic part 162SG)
Next, the feature section 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko game machine 162SG001 having the characteristic part 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 with the basic configuration described above, and the same configurations with the same reference numerals as the basic configuration will be referred to here. The description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 having the characteristic section 162SG that is different from the pachinko game machine 1 having the basic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 14-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, At the lower left side of the gaming area, there is a variable display time extension described below for adjusting the number of gaming balls that are paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to the determination of a high ball state. A high ball status notification LED 162SG071 is provided so as to be visible to the player to notify by lighting that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being performed.

These high ball status notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and are connected to the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control). 100), the lighting/extinguishing of the lights is controlled by executing the ball dispensing state determination process (see Figure 14-13), which will be described later, and the control cycle of these lighting/extinguishing is based on the first special symbol The control period is the same as that of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed when the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 lights up and the high ball state is determined. It is now possible to confirm (understand) the

FIG. 14-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 162SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-2(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-2(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 14-2 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state where probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variation. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command 96XXH is a ball release state designation command that designates the determination status of ball release state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the ball dispensing state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the judgment situation of the ball dispensing state determination, as shown in FIG. 14-2(C). As a specific example, the command 9600H is a command that specifies ball output state 1 corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined to be a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is a command that specifies a ball output state 1 that corresponds to a low ball output state that is not determined to be a high ball output state, and a command 9601H is set when the number of successive jackpots is the first determination number (5 The ball output state 2 designation command corresponds to the judgment state in which the number of consecutive jackpots is less than the second judgment number (10 times). This is a ball release state 3 designation command corresponding to a determination state that has been determined to be a second high ball output state that is equal to or greater than 2 determination times (10 times).

Command 97XXH is a command that notifies the number of consecutive hits after determination, which is the number of jackpots that have occurred in the determined high ball state since it was determined to be a high ball state, and corresponds to the number of consecutive hits after determination. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the production control board 12 side based on the EXT data.

Command 98XXH is a command to notify the remaining number of variable displays after determination, which is the number of variable displays executed after the high ball state was determined (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state). By setting the EXT data corresponding to the remaining display number, the variable remaining display number after determination is specified on the production control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) and a small hit as a determination result at the time of winning. It is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-2 (A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-3, in this feature section 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 162SG, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 provides variable display results in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before a confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot game state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is a table that

In the display result determination table 1 in this feature section 162SG, the special figure A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in this feature section 162SG, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when it is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 162SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes high.

Further, FIG. 14-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 provides a variable display result in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A and a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. Before a confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the display result determination table 2 in this feature section 162SG, the special figure A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the feature section 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small win" is different depending on whether it is a first special symbol game or a second special symbol game. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 14-5(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 162SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 162SG using FIG. 14-5(B), in this feature section 162SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in the feature section 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature section 162SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 162SG, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 14-6). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 162SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In addition, a jackpot that occurs in a low base state may be described as a first jackpot (first hit), and a jackpot that occurs in a time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) is referred to as a consecutive jackpot (consecutive jackpot). In some cases, it is written as "Sho hitori". Further, the period of the jackpot state and high base state from the time when the first jackpot (initial win) occurs until it is controlled to the normal state thereafter is also referred to as the consecutive winning period (advantageous period). In addition, in this feature section 162SG, even if a variable probability jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the corresponding jackpot, so the variable probability jackpot C is not regarded as the first jackpot (first hit), but is a jackpot in the variable probability state after the variable probability jackpot C. When this occurs, the corresponding jackpot is regarded as the first jackpot (first hit), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these certain variable jackpots C are regarded as the first jackpot (first hit), and the corresponding probable variable jackpot C The subsequent high-probability-low base state period may also be included in the consecutive winning period (advantageous period).

Although not implemented in this feature section 162SG, instead of the variable probability jackpot C, a sudden time-saving jackpot that changes the gaming state after the jackpot to a low probability high base state may be provided, and in this case, Suddenly, the time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving symbol (for example, a stop symbol of 137 or a stop symbol dedicated to time-saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is released. In this way, when the normal state is directly controlled to the high base state, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive winning period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) is the period from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state afterwards. It is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-5 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-6 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 162SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 162SG includes a special winning variation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-7, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the Variation Pattern Judgment Table A for Jackpot. (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since the value is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the variation pattern judgment table for special winnings, and change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this feature section 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, determine the variation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach variation pattern) do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach out of reach), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out of reach), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach out of reach). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. It is determined from PA2-1 (a time-saving shortening variation pattern that is out of reach for non-reach), PA2-1 (a variation pattern that is out of normal reach), and PA2-2 (a variation pattern that is out of super reach).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 162SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball output state will be explained using FIG. 14-8. The ball output status flag in FIG. 14-8 is a flag that is updated by the ball output status determination process shown in FIG. 14-13, which will be described later. This flag is set to ``1'' when the ball is in a high ball output state, and is set to ``2'' when the ball is in the second high ball output state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low ball state, a first high ball state, or a second high ball state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state where the ball output status flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in Figure 14-6. The variable display time corresponding to the case where the state flag is set to "0" is not extended, but the variable display time corresponding to the first high ball output state where the ball release state flag is set to "1" is variable. The variable display time is the variable display time of the variable pattern of non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which has a high appearance frequency, and the variable display time of the variable pattern of non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which corresponds to "0" in the ball release status flag. 4) If a variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern is set and extended, and the ball release status flag is set to "1", the extended variable display time is By performing variable display of out-of-reach results, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the variable pattern corresponding to the second high ball release state where the ball release state flag is set to "2" is the non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) that appears frequently and the normal reach. The variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of miss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) is changed to non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) corresponding to "1" in the ball release status flag. PA2-1) and the variable display time that is longer than the variable display time of the normal reach jackpot variable pattern is set and extended, and if the ball release status flag is set to "2", these extensions will be extended. The average variable display time becomes even longer by executing the variable display of non-reach out, normal reach out, and normal reach jackpot in the variable display time.

Regarding the non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-shortened variable pattern, the extended variable display time is 1 second in the first high ball output state where the ball output status flag is "1"; In the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2", it is 1.5 seconds, and for non-reach PA1-2 to non-reach PA1-4, which is a shortening variation pattern, the ball output state flag is "1". In the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", it is 0.5 seconds, and in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", it is 1.0 seconds, and the reach fluctuation pattern is PA2. -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", and in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". It is 5 seconds.

Note that the length of the extended variable display time shown in FIG. 14-8 is an example, and the length may be extended differently from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than the extension in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 14-8, by extending the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, which is executed more frequently due to a high decision ratio, and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach, which is executed more frequently than super reach, In addition to efficiently increasing the average variable display time, the data capacity can be increased by storing multiple pieces of data by extending the variable display time for the reach and super reach variation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to performance due to the long variable display time. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the predetermined extension time may be set to "1 second" for all fluctuation patterns. The variable display time may be uniformly added to and extended, and during these extended periods, a common effect using common effect data may be executed in each variable pattern.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 14-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output status flag is "1", only the non-reaching fluctuation pattern is extended, and when the ball output status flag is "2", In the same way that the reach variation pattern is also extended when the second high ball payout state is reached, by increasing the number of variation patterns that are subject to extension in the second high ball payout state, the average variable display time can be further increased. Although the present invention is designed to be extended efficiently, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the ball release state flag is "2", the variation pattern is extended when the ball release state flag is "1". It may also be possible to prevent the control load related to the extension from increasing excessively by further extending the ball so that the fluctuation pattern of the extension target does not change depending on the ball release state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 14-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is a gaming state in which variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, but also the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4, which will be described later. In order to be able to cope with the case where a jackpot occurs again with a small number of variable displays after the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) ends and the control is returned to the normal state, these consecutive winning periods (advantageous period) end. In order to be able to extend the variable display in the normal state when this occurs, the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state are also extended. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to extend only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is a gaming state in which variable display is performed during the consecutive game period. .

The RAM 102 in the feature section 162SG includes a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 162SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 162SG153, a game control counter setting section 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section 162SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 162SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 162SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball release state flag.

The game control timer setting section 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting section 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting section 162SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, for example, for performance control as shown in FIG. 14-10(A). A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 14-10(A) includes a production control flag setting section 162SG191, a production control timer setting section 162SG192, a production control counter setting section 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 162SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 162SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 162SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 162SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 162SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 162SG194. The start winning command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A of the feature section 162SG, it is stored whether or not the display pattern has not yet been determined in conjunction with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 9). In other words, due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the display pattern has not yet been determined because the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. A display undetermined flag indicating , and a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, respectively corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with a buffer number.

In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A of this feature section 162SG has a storage area so that the performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the production restriction flag means that, in the command analysis process (Figure 14-22), a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, but the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the number of pending memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not a target of a pre-read preview performance when a notification command is not received within a first pending storage number notification waiting time or a second pending storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of display of pending memory different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 14-10(B) are sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing of the feature section 162SG will be explained based on FIG. 14-11. As shown in FIG. 14-11, the gaming control main processing of this feature section 162SG also executes almost the same processing as the gaming control main processing in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but the characteristics of the gaming control main processing of this feature section 162SG are The difference is that the contents of the recovery process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, a process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball release state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG, a process of restoring the ball output state flag to the state before the power cut is executed. As will be described later, in the power outage process in step S19 in the game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 14-12, the backup data stored when a power outage occurs includes Contains data on the flag value of the ball release status flag at the time.

As for the specific recovery status of the ball output state flag, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" corresponding to a low ball output state when a power outage occurs, the ball output state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball dispensing state when a power outage occurs, the recovery process sets the ball dispensing state flag to "1" and when a power outage occurs, When the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball dispensing state, "2" is set in the ball dispensing state flag by the recovery process. That is, by the restoration process in S4, the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to the value before the power outage, and the ball dispensing state before the power outage is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the number of consecutive games after the judgment and the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment, which will be described later, and these data on the number of consecutive games after the judgment and the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment are also stored in S4. The data is restored to the data at the time of power outage through the restoration process.

In this way, the value of the ball release state flag is restored to the value before the power outage by the restoration process in step S4, and the data of the number of successive hits after determination and the number of variable display remaining times after determination are restored. Even if a power outage occurs in the first ball dispensing state or second ball dispensing state where the ball dispensing speed is being adjusted, the adjustment of these ball dispensing speeds will not end due to the power outage and will continue after the power outage is restored. will also be continued.

On the other hand, if the recovery condition is not met in step S3, the initialization process in step S6a is executed, and initial settings (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) at power-on, etc. are executed. Later, the ball output state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball output state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power is turned on when the power failure recovery conditions are not met (when power supply starts other than power failure recovery), "0", which is the value corresponding to the low ball output state, is set to the ball output state flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball dispensing speed from being adjusted inappropriately when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 14-12, the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature section 162SG will be explained. The game control timer interrupt process of this feature section 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same way as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration The difference is that the power cut-off process in step S19, which was omitted in , and the ball-out state determination process, which is a feature of the game control timer interrupt process of the feature section 162SG, are included.

In the power-off process in step S19, it is detected whether a power-off signal is output from the power supply board 17 (whether it is in an on state). The power-off signal is a signal output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that a power-off signal has been output, as described above, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-mentioned ball dispensing state flag, etc., which is necessary to restore the state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of the power outage. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. Note that if the output of the power-off signal is not detected, the power-off process is ended. After executing the ball release state determination process in step S20, each process in steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball release state determination process in step S20 of the feature section 162SG will be explained using FIG. 14-13(a). FIG. 14-13(a) is a flowchart showing an example of the processing contents of the ball release state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is a low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether the state is the state or the second high ball state (step 162SGS01).

If the value of the ball release status flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5". It is determined whether there is one (step 162SGS02). If the first determination number is not "5" or more, that is, if the player is not in a consecutive winning state, or even if he is in a consecutive winning state, the number of consecutive winnings is less than 5 (step 162 SGS02; N), The ball release state determination process ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times (step 162 SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the second determination number of times of "10" or not. It is determined (step 162SGS03).

If the number of consecutive hits is not equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10" (step 162SGS03;N), that is, when the number of consecutive hits reaches the first determination number of "5", the first ball-out state is reached. It is determined that the ball release state flag is set to "1" corresponding to the first ball release state (step 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 14-13(b) (step 162SGS07). ). In addition, the number of consecutive wins is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, so the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive wins is a jackpot for which the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first stage is not executed, and the first stage of the jackpot is The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the 6th to 10th jackpots in a row.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare presentation period at the start of the jackpot state, which is the period in which the special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the big winning opening is not released, and at the end of the round game. The interval period from the start of the next round to the start of the next round, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball state where the ball state flag is set to 0, so that the same number of game balls can be played. By extending the period of the jackpot game in which the balls are paid out, the number of game balls paid out in a unit time is reduced.

As shown in Figure 14-21, the extension length of the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period is longer than the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is set to "1". The second high ball state where the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first high ball state where the ball state flag is set to "1" is , the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first stage where the extension length is relatively short, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the second high ball output state where "2" is set in the ball output state flag, the extension length is relatively short. This is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting to notify that the high ball state has been reached (step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high ball state is determined is set to a predetermined number of times. In addition to setting the number of variable display remaining after judgment (100) to specify the remaining number of times until reaching 100, the number of continuous jackpots after judgment that has occurred since the high ball state was determined. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process advances to step 162SGS17. In addition, although this feature section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the predetermined number of times is 100, the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may vary depending on specifications such as jackpot probability and jackpot continuation rate. You may change it as appropriate.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive hits is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10" (step 162 SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive hits reaches the second determination number of "10", It was determined that the state was reached, and the ball dispensing state flag was set to "2" corresponding to the second ball dispensing state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment was started as shown in FIG. 14-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), the process advances to step 162SGS17. Incidentally, since the number of successive wins is updated in the jackpot termination process as described later, the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment will be executed for the jackpot after the 11th successive win number.

In addition, if the value of the ball release state flag is not "0" (step 162 SGS01; N), check whether the number of consecutive games after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times of completion determination for ending the adjustment. In other words, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games after the determination has reached 10, which is the number of times of end determination (step 162SGS10). Note that although this feature section 162SG exemplifies a configuration in which the number of times the end determination is made is 10, the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may vary depending on specifications such as jackpot probability and jackpot continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive hits after determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (step 162SGS10;N), that is, after the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more and it is determined that the high ball state is occurring, the consecutive winning state is When the number of successive game jackpots that occur without ending reaches 10, it is determined whether the gaming state is in a low base state, that is, whether the consecutive game state has ended or not. (Step 162SGS11) If the gaming state is the low base state (Step 162SGS11; Y), the process advances to Step 162SGS13. Note that the number of consecutive games is reset when the consecutive games state ends and the low base state is reached.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive games after the determination is not 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (Step 162SGS10; N), or if the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (Step 162SGS10; Y) If the gaming state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether the remaining number of variable display after determination set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is determined that the high ball payout state is reached, the variable display will be displayed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times. If not executed, the ball release state determination process is ended.

If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, if the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, since it was determined that the high ball payout state is in effect, Proceed to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, the ball output state flag is updated to "0", and after the above-mentioned first stage or second stage adjustment is completed (step 162SGS14), the lighting of the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is ended. After finishing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the high ball payout state (step 162SGS15), the variable display remaining number after determination and the number of successive games after determination are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after executing the transmission setting of the ball dispensing state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball dispensing state flag set in step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06, or step 162SGS13, the ball dispensing state is determined. Finish the process. The ball release state designation command set for transmission in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

As described above, by executing the ball dispensing state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13(a), as shown in FIG. 14-13(b), the value of the dispensing ball state flag changes to the value at the start of power supply. Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment that extends the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment that extends the period of the jackpot game, but the first When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" due to the determination of a high ball output state, the variable display time of the first stage is extended to the length of the first stage. Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, if the value of the ball release state flag is updated to "2" due to the second high ball release state being determined in the ball release state determination process, the variable display time is longer than the first stage. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment, in which the length of the jackpot game is extended to the stage length, and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment, in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the second stage length, which is longer than the first stage. The execution of these adjustments is notified by lighting of the high ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, if the value of the ball-out state flag is "1" or "2" and the number of consecutive games after the judgment reaches the end judgment number, or if the remaining number of variable display after the judgment becomes 0 (ball-out state flag If the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of is set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball release status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment is completed.

In addition, the present feature section 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not limited to this, the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 does not light up from the timing when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "0" to "1" during normal gaming, and the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 If a power outage occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", the light may be turned on only for a certain period of time after the power outage is restored.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball release state flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball release state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball release state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball release state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball release state designation command to the production control board 12 only when the value of the ball release state flag changes. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 always sends the ball dispensing state designation command to the production control board 12 each time the ball dispensing state determination process is executed or the variable display is executed. It may also be sent to. Furthermore, in the characteristic section 162SG, although a form in which a ball-dispensing state designation command is provided as a part of the production control command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-dispensing state designation commands. , a game state designation command corresponding to each ball output state (low ball output state, first high ball output state, second high ball output state) may be provided.

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 162SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIG. 14-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 162 SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 162 SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 162SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 162SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 162SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 162SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 162SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 162 SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 162SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 162SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 162SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 162SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 162SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 162SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 162 SGS 113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115), and then the process of step 162SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 14-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 14-14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 162SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 14-17) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 162 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the gaming control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting section 162SG152, etc. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking or the like (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 162SGS121, display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, the individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 162 SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 combines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to make a point-by-point comparison to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 162SGS123; N), display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is Select and set (step 162SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be determined as a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 162SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 162SGS128). 162SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 162SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 14-7, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C, , In the variation pattern judgment table A for a loss, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, values exceeding 0 to A within the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach variation patterns. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for failure in step 162SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-15 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 162SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Proceed to 162SGS138.

Further, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), proceed to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (Step 162SGS137) and proceeds to Step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 162SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIGS. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 14-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 162SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B corresponding to the reservation number "1" As data, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 162 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section 162SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 162SGS144), the process moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Bye. In this way, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out as data (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 162 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated by 1, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 162SGS148), the process moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is used as a table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit" or a "miss". Select and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or a "miss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ) If it falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be a "miss". In addition, in a low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so In the processing of the 162SGS 150a, the special figure display result is determined by using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is a high accuracy state or not. When the gaming state is in a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a "jackpot" with a higher probability than in the case where it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches (step 162 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1"; If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. If the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result should be a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162SGS156, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and whether to control to the small winning gaming state (whether the small winning flag is turned on or not). A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not the jackpot is played or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 162SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 162SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small win", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small prize symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 162SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "probable variable jackpot C", that is, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "non-probable variable jackpot B", or "non-probable variable jackpot B". If it is either "probable variable jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), jackpot variation pattern determination table A or jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select and set the jackpot type to determine whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B. ”, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special winning variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the determination at step 162SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), the special win variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time-saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 162SG152, the game state is changed to a variable probability state or a time-saving state. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in the state (step 162 SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 162SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example, the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 is stored. By reading the value, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. and set (step 162SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. The error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the error pattern (step 162SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the same fluctuation pattern, if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "1", the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the first one corresponding to the first high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time that has been adjusted to be extended by one stage will be determined, and if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time that has undergone the second stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, a variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball release state flag.

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is to be "reach". That is, the process of step 162SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 162SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 162SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 162SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, a special symbol variable display time, which is a variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the value of the ball release state flag, is set for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175 (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The specification command, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variation start command, second variation start command, and variation pattern specification command are sent. , the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and if the jackpot flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is also turned on. It is determined whether there is one (step 162SGS183).

If the small hit flag is in the on state, settings are made to the performance control board 12 to transmit a winning start 5 designation command corresponding to the small win (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small winning display time is set in the small winning display time timer (step 162SGS190b). Further, the number of openings (for example, two times) is set in the number of openings counter of the big winning opening (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182; Y) and the probability variable flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 162SGS182; Y). 162SGS184), hit start 1 specified command (probable variable jackpot A), hit start 2 specified command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 specified command (probable variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. ), settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time corresponding to the execution period of a fanfare performance to notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS 187). At this time, as the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer, the jackpot display time is set according to the ball release state flag.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21, if the value of the ball output status flag is "0", the 30000 milliseconds corresponding to the non-extended fanfare performance period corresponding to the low ball output status is 30000 milliseconds. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball release state flag is "1", 40,000 milliseconds corresponding to 40,000 milliseconds, which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball release state, is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60,000 milliseconds corresponding to 60,000 milliseconds, which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. Although not particularly illustrated in this feature section 162SG, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game that ended in the jackpot game end process is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the gaming state is controlled to a high-accuracy, high-base state), and the value of the time saving number counter is set to "0", and in the jackpot game termination process, the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot C. If there is, the probability change flag is turned on (the gaming state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and the value of the time saving number counter is set to "0". Then, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game that has ended in the jackpot game end process is a non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets the value of the time saving number counter to "100". ing. In some cases, the process proceeds to step 162SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 162SGS190; N). 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 162SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 162SGS195), the process advances to step 162SGS196. Incidentally, with the execution of step 162SGS195, the number of consecutive games is also reset.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162SGS196). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number update process, it is determined whether the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0" or not, and if it is not "0" (if there is a remaining number), the remaining number is set to 1. The subtractive update is performed, and if it is "0", the post-determination variable display remaining number update process is ended.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 14-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), set the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending performance that displays the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 as the jackpot end display time. (Step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, the jackpot end display time is set according to the ball release state flag. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer corresponding to 60,000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball output state, is activated. The value is set. In addition, if the value of the ball release state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball release state, is set, and the ball release state is If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball payout state, is set.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is probability variable jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), step 162SGS211 and step 162SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 162SGS214). Then, transmission settings are made for a gaming state designation command for notifying the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 162SGS215).

Then, the process of updating the number of consecutive games and the number of consecutive games after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the completed jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in a low base state as described above or a consecutive jackpot that occurred in a high base state, for example, It is identified from the value of the state flag before jackpot start (“0” if it is a low base, “1” if it is a high base) corresponding to the state before the occurrence of the jackpot, and if it is the first jackpot, it is determined by the number of consecutive wins Set "1". On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in consecutive games, since the number of consecutive games is already a value other than "0", 1 is added to the number of consecutive games to be updated. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in consecutive games, if an initial value is set in the number of consecutive games after determination, 1 is added to and updated to the number of consecutive games after determination.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

Although not particularly illustrated in this feature section 162SG, if the number of round executions has not reached the set upper limit number in the jackpot release post-processing (step S116), the CPU 103 executes Set the interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball output state. Set. Further, if the value of the ball output state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state, is set. Further, if the value of the ball output state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

After setting these timer values to the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the jackpot release post-processing is executed. While controlling the opening of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process, that is, a new round game is started.

In this way, in this feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-20, during the period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the end of the jackpot game based on the derived display of the jackpot symbol, the ball release state flag is set. Regardless of the value, the round game continues until a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the grand prize opening, so the ball output status flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change depending on the value. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 14-20 and 14-21, the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening because the grand prize opening is closed, that is, the fanfare production in which it is impossible to win the prize ball. The period, interval period, and ending presentation period become longer as the value of the ball release state flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball dispensing status flag, which prevents the number of prize balls that the player can acquire from decreasing, while also preventing the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game from decreasing. By changing (lengthening) the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period, which are the periods during which winnings cannot be won in the winning slot, depending on the value of the ball dispensing status flag, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time can be increased. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained.

FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 14-22, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). When it is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 162SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), a second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS224 (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). When the command is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 162SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (Step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (Step 162SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 162SGS231). .

After executing either of the processes in step 162SGS229 or step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the received command at step 162SGS226 is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the received command at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or at step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the process returns to step 162SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to be able to sequentially store the production control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 162SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 162SGS230 (step 162SGS230; N), settings corresponding to other received commands are performed (step 162SGS234), and then the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, when the received command is a ball dispensing state designation command, the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball dispensing state from the ball dispensing state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, and also specifies the ball dispensing state according to the identified ball dispensing state. What is necessary is to perform processing such as turning on the flag. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can identify the ball release state by referring to the flag.

Note that if there is no received command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first pending storage number notification waiting time or the second pending storage number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS221;N). 162SGS237). If the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed. If the several notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), set the display undetermined flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry to the production restriction flag to "1" (turn the display undetermined flag on), Ends command analysis processing.

FIG. 14-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and determines whether there is a new storage of the starting winning command. is determined based on whether there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a; N), the process advances to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination is made. It is determined whether the remaining number of times of post-variable display is less than or equal to the limited number of times of pre-reading (step 162SGS242b). If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit (step 162SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 162SGS250, and as described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. Set.

In addition, if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is greater than the prefetch limit number (step 162SGS242b; N), check whether the performance restriction flag of the entry is in the on state (whether it is set to "1" or not) (Step 162SGS242c). If the production restriction flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the performance restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a probability-variable jackpot. It is determined whether it is a symbol designation command indicating a C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small win (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is , is set in the pending display flag. In other words, the pre-read preview performance is not executed for the pending memory that will result in a probability variable jackpot C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (any of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or non-probable variable jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting section 162SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(A), the presence or absence of a pre-read preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162SGS244. .

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the advance notice effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than guaranteed variable jackpot C, the pre-read preview effect will not be determined to be non-executable, and the pre-read preview effect will always be decided to be executed and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (notice type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", the proportion of display patterns β determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by the display pattern α. The percentage is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" or "non-probable variable jackpot", the proportion at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The percentage of probability-variable jackpots A increases, and the player's expectations for the probability-variable jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability-variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-read preview performance. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β, which is displayed in a white star shape (☆), is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a variable jackpot C Even if it is a "jackpot" other than the above, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect, as in the case where the variable display result is a "miss".

In addition, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 162SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 162SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-24(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 162SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5D. It is displayed in the memory display area 5U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U in a round shape (◯) which is the normal mode.

As shown in Figure 14-24(B), if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than when the is ``non-reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to the highest value, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest value.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-24 (A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be executed (no preview effect). The rate at which the preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is that the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any variable pattern category is determined when the variable display result is “miss”. The percentage is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot (Probability Variable A)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which the display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probable variable jackpot A". Since the percentage becomes higher, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players.

After executing step 162SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 162SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS249).

After executing step 162SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending memory display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

In addition, in step 162SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 162SGS250) and proceeds to step 162SGS251.

In addition, after executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undetermined flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the storage contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 162SG194A after the shift are changed according to the stored contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (see FIG. 14-25). As shown in A), the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display format is "○" as shown in Figure 14-25 (B). If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed as "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. Furthermore, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 14-25 (B), two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will correspond to the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of , for example, the pending memory display of 1 is a display mode of "○", the pending memory display of 1 is a display mode of "☆", and the second pending memory display is displayed. Displayed in area 5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, as the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (this characteristic part 162SG, it shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag. It comes to be displayed in the memory display area 5U.

Note that although this characteristic section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 162SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch notice setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 162SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new command at the time of starting winning is stored in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 162SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement effect. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 14-26 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 162SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the upper position (step 162SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing Step 162SGS272 or Step 162SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (Step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols will be "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbol will be "334", "778", etc., which is the same chance as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol. Decide on a combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned chance (missing symbols), and if the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative symbols such as "121" or "464" that is out of reach (missing symbols). ) to determine.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 14-27, and determines whether or not to execute the preview performance in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in the present feature section 162SG, in the preview performance determination process, a mode is exemplified in which execution of any one of the four preview performances A to Preview performance D can be determined as described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executable preview performances may be three or less or five or more.

In the preview performance determination process of the feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the ball release state and sets a preview performance type determination table corresponding to the identified ball release state (step 162SGS290). Note that the ball dispensing state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when the ball dispensing state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state as a low ball output state, it selects the preview performance type determination table A and sets the ball output state to the first high. If the ball-out state is specified, table B for determining the type of preview performance is selected, and if the ball-out state is specified as the second high ball-out state, table C for determining the preview performance type may be selected.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining a preview performance is extracted, and the table for determining the type of preview performance set in step 162SG290 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of preview performance if executed (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, 85 % determines whether to execute the preview effect, 10% determines the execution of the preview effect A, 5% determines the execution of the preview effect B, and 0% determines the execution of the preview effect C. The execution is decided, and the execution of the preview effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 50% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 30% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the preview performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 25%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 65%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice performance C is determined to be executed at a rate of 0%, and advance notice performance D is determined to be executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the table B for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Decide to execute preview effect A at a rate of 10%, decide to execute preview effect B at a rate of 5%, decide to execute preview effect C at a rate of 0%, and decide to execute preview effect C at a rate of 0%. Deciding to execute preview performance D. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 50% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the preview performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 25%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 50%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice effect C is decided to be executed at a rate of 15%, and advance notice effect D is decided to be executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, using table C for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. At a rate of 8%, it is decided to execute preview effect A, at a rate of 4% it is decided to execute preview effect B, at a rate of 3% it is decided to execute preview effect C, and at a rate of 0%. Deciding to execute preview performance D. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 45% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview effect C is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the preview effect D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 15%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 45%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice effect C is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and advance notice effect D is decided to be executed at a rate of 10%.

In other words, among the preview performances in this feature section 162SG, the preview performance D is set to have the highest jackpot expectation level (the percentage of variable display results that are jackpots), and the preview performance C has a higher jackpot expectation level than the preview performance D. The forecast performance B has a lower jackpot expectation level than the preview performance C, and the preview performance A has a lower jackpot expectation level than the preview performance B. When the preview performance is not executed, the jackpot expectation level is set lower than when any preview performance is executed (Jackpot expectation level: Preview performance D > Preview performance C > Preview performance B > Preview performance A> Preview performance not performed).

Also, looking at the number of preview performances that can be executed in each ball output state, there are two preview performances that can be executed in the low ball output state, preview performance A and preview performance B, and those that can be executed in the first high ball output state. There are three preview performances: Preview Production A, Preview Production B, and Preview Production C. Preview productions that can be executed in the second high ball state are Preview Production A, Preview Production B, Preview Production C, and Preview Production D. There are 4 pieces. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, by continuing the continuous winning state after the first hit occurs, the number of preview effects that can be executed during the variable display increases, so that the game is prolonged during the continuous winning. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to storage.

In particular, in the second high ball state, it is possible to execute the preview effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a jackpot, so during the variable display in the second high ball state, the preview effect D can be executed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (step 162SGS293). If execution of the preview performance has not been decided (step 162SGS293; N), the preview performance determination process is ended. Further, if it is decided to execute the preview effect (step 162SGS293; Y), the preview effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), and the preview effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295). The performance determination process ends.

After executing the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In other words, it is determined whether one of the "notice presentation A" and "notice presentation B" has been determined in the notice presentation determination process of step 162SGS277.

If the preview performance execution determination flag is in the on state, the process advances to step 162SGS279, sets a value corresponding to the period until the start of the preview performance in the preview performance start wait timer (step 162SGS279), and executes the preview performance. The decision flag is turned off (step 162SGS280) and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, if the preview performance execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without passing through step 162SGS279 and step 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these preview performances, in this feature section 162SG, before the timing when the preview performance is started, a performance (not shown) indicating a precursor to the execution of the preview performance is performed, and the precursor is started. Since the timing is set as the start timing of the preview performance, a period shorter than the period until the start of the preview performance is set, and the start timing of these preview performances is determined by the process table of the preview performance that is executed from the start of the preview performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if these precursor performances are not performed in the preview performance, the preview performance is Since the start timing is the start timing of the preview performance, the period up to the start timing of the preview performance may be set as a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance.

In step 162SGS281, the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state and selects a production control pattern (process table) according to the identified ball release state and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the production control CPU 120 may identify the ball release state by referring to the value of the production ball release state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball release state and the variable pattern designation command (step 162SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, by the performance control CPU 120 executing the variable display start setting process, in this feature section 162SG, the ball output state can be set to any of the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, and the second high ball output state. Even in this case, it is possible to perform variable display of decorative symbols in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, this feature section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the production control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols according to the ball dispensing state based on the value of the production ball dispensing state flag and the fluctuation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 sends a fluctuation pattern determination state designation that specifies in which ball release state the fluctuation pattern designation command was determined, together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. Commands can be sent to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and each time the performance control CPU 120 receives these fluctuation pattern designation commands and fluctuation pattern determination state designation commands, it creates a decorative pattern according to the ball appearance state. It may also be possible to perform a variable display of.

FIG. 14-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set (it has been decided to perform the preview performance) or the flag showing the execution of the preview performance is on (the preview performance is being executed). If yes (step 162SGS304; Y), a preview effect process is executed (step 162SGS305). If both the timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance and the flag during execution of the preview performance are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the preview performance process of step 162SGS305.

In step 162SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 162SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the on state (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the value of the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 162SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

In addition, when executing a preview performance with the preview performance start wait timer set, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the preview performance start wait timer in the preview performance processing, and then waits for the start of the preview performance. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the timer for waiting for the start of a preview performance has timed out, that is, when it is time to start the preview performance, the process table for the preview performance corresponding to the type of preview performance that has been decided to be executed is selected, and the process table for the preview performance is selected. Start the timer. That is, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the first process data in the process table for advance notice production. Further, the preview performance processing is ended by turning on the preview performance execution flag.

When the preview performance is executed when the flag indicating that the preview performance is being executed is in the on state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the preview performance by decrement, and the process timer for the preview performance times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer for preview presentation has not timed out, control the presentation device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for preview presentation has timed out, , to switch process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next preview performance again and control the performance device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the preview performance process as described above, the preview performance can be executed during variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG described above, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a mode in which only the light is turned on and off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is The variable display time extension adjustment is being executed because the variable display is being executed, but when the jackpot period extension adjustment is not being executed because the jackpot is not in the state, it lights up in green (first mode) and the high output is displayed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, it lights up in red (second mode). It may also be possible to check (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG described above, the consecutive winning state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0 → 1 → 2 (the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high ball output state). The ball output per unit time can be increased by lengthening the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period of the jackpot game during the consecutive winning state (according to Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the number of prize balls is suppressed, that is, the speed at which prize balls are awarded is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table for high ball state, which has a high determination rate of fluctuation patterns with a longer special symbol fluctuation time such as the fluctuation pattern of super reach than the ball state, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It is also possible to lengthen the period until the ball is released, and to suppress the number of balls put out per unit time.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-read preview performance for a form in which a fluctuation pattern can be determined using the high ball state fluctuation pattern determination table in the first high ball state and the second high ball state, the judgment When the remaining number of variable displays after judgment is still set to a value of 1 or more, if a pending memory of the variable display to be executed after the remaining number of variable displays after judgment becomes 0 occurs, the performance pattern of the pre-read preview effect. There is a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by (e.g., a variable display is executed depending on a fluctuating pattern of reach), there is a risk that the pre-read preview performance may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the above-mentioned feature section 162SG's prefetch notice setting process (see FIG. 14-23), if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit, a prefetch notice effect is executed. By restricting this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the advance notice performance and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby preventing the advance notice performance from being inappropriate. This can be prevented from happening.

Although not particularly shown in the feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the value of the ball-out state flag for performance in the jackpot performance process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for a fanfare performance according to the process timer and controlling the performance device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare performance according to the ball release state can be executed.

Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the feature section 162SG, the production control CPU 120 refers to the value of the ball dispensing state flag for production in the ending production process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the ending effect according to the ball release state can be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the ball output state is a low ball output state or a high ball output state by executing the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13. If it is determined that the ball output state is a high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to a low ball output state to a high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to ) is now possible. Also, after setting the ball dispensing state flag to "1", the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the variable display has been executed 100 times, that is, the ball dispensing state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during jackpot games will be returned to their original periods (ending the adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls per unit time) ). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during the period of consecutive winnings, and it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when setting the value of the ball release state flag from "0" to "1", as shown in Figure 14-8, only the special figure variable display time of the non-reach variable pattern is By not prolonging the special feature variable display time of normal reach and super reach variation patterns, we are suppressing the increase in the amount of data related to variable display, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. This prevents a decline in interest due to this.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, by setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment is started to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, and the variable display is displayed 100 times. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls is completed by setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag to "0" again based on the execution, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, for example, it is equipped with a timer that can measure time (e.g., a real-time clock or a timer), and based on the fact that the timer measures a certain period of time (e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. The adjustment may then be completed. In other words, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain period of time has passed during the consecutive winning state after the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag to "1".

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, an example is provided in which only one termination condition for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is that variable display is executed 100 times, The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. In addition, when setting multiple termination conditions for terminating the adjustment in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. The adjustment may be ended.

Also, as shown in Figure 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state. state, the special figure variable display time in the fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state). Therefore, by lengthening the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the consecutive game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls during the period of consecutive winnings without reducing the speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-20 and 14-21, during a jackpot game, if the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2". The fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during which the game ball cannot enter the grand prize slot are set longer than when "0" is set as ``0''. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the jackpot between each round game during a jackpot game without reducing the number of game balls that can win a prize during each round game according to the value of the ball dispensing state flag. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the consecutive winning state can be reduced.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", the jackpot game is more likely to be played than when the value of the ball release state flag is set to "0". Although we have exemplified a form in which a total of three periods, the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period, are extended, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball release state flag may be "1" or If "2" is set, any one of the fanfare performance period, interval period, ending performance period during the jackpot game will be more effective than when "0" is set as the value of the ball release state flag. The two periods may be made longer.

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball release state flag from 0 → 1 → 2. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, for example, when the value of the ball release status flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period are updated. If any one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball release state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining period may be lengthened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag as low ball output. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the time the pachinko game machine 1 is started up. Furthermore, if the recovery upper limit is established, that is, if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, "1" or "2" will be set as the value of the ball dispensing state flag at the time of the power outage. If it has been set, the CPU 103 will set the value of the ball dispensing state flag to "1" or "2" again, so the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls should be made from the moment the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power outage. Can be restarted.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, if the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of the power outage, the CPU 103 will issue a ball. Although we have illustrated an example in which the value of the status flag is set to "1" or "2" again, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls that was being executed at the time of the power outage may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored as backup data when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 determines that the ball is in a high ball state in the ball state determination process, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. By lighting the high ball state notification LED 162SG071, it can be recognized from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls is being performed.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, a mode in which the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is controlled by the performance control. It may be an LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU 103) can transmit control information (performance control command) that can specify whether or not the high awarding state is present to the performance control means (performance control CPU 120). The production control means should include a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162SG071) capable of informing that the high award state is controlled in response to identifying the high award state from the control information. Bye.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, a form is illustrated in which a high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as a notification means that can notify that it is determined to be a high award state (high ball state) in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification means may include a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) that notifies by outputting a specific sound that the high ball state is determined, and a high ball state. An image display means (for example, image display device 5) that notifies that the determination has been made by displaying a specific image, and an information output means that can output information (signal) corresponding to the fact that the high ball output state has been determined. etc. may be used.

In addition, the control cycle for turning on and off the high ball status notification LED 162SG071 is the same as the control cycle for turning on and off the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Then, the CPU 103 can perform notification by the high ball status notification LED 162SG071 using the same lighting/extinguishing control as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It becomes.

In addition, the CPU 103 performs the production control board 12 (production control It is possible to send a ball dispensing state designation command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command in the preview performance determination process, and changes the ball release state to the specified ball release state. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display and the performance type of the preview performance to be executed using a corresponding table for determining the type of preview performance. In particular, in this feature section 162SG, a preview performance (notice performance type) that can be executed respectively when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, and when the ball output state is the second ball output state. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to improve the game's interest by executing preview performances according to these ball placement states.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, and when the ball output state is the second ball output state, the execution is performed respectively. Although possible preview presentations (notice presentation types) have been illustrated as examples, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball payout state is a low ball payout state and when the ball payout state is a first high ball payout state. , when the ball is in the second ball output state, the executable preview effects (preview effect types) may be the same, but the determination ratios for each preview effect type may be different, and if the ball release state is low Regardless of whether the ball is in the ball state, the first high ball state, or the second ball state, the determination ratio of the executable preview performance (preview performance type) and each preview performance type is the same. There may be.

In addition, this feature section 162SG makes it possible to execute a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, and exemplifies a form in which the type of executable preview performance is different depending on the ball release state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, during a jackpot game, there may be a probability variation suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game will be controlled to a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game, or if the jackpot game continues for up to 10 rounds during a jackpot game. A continuation suggestion performance etc. that suggests continuation can be executed in multiple performance types, and when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when it is a first high ball output state, and when it is a second high ball output state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of the type of performance that can be executed as the variable suggestion performance or the continuous suggestion performance and the type of performance that can be performed may be changed depending on the case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated due to the start winning in multiple display patterns by executing the prefetch notice setting process. A pre-read preview performance can be executed, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is varied depending on which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the prefetch preview performance (changes the pending display to normal white) if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit number in the prefetch preview setting process. (displayed with a blank ○), so if a pre-read notice effect is executed for a pending memory that occurred during a starting winning in the first high ball state or second high ball state, the pre-read notice effect will be It is now possible to prevent the advance preview performance from becoming inappropriate due to the ball output state changing to a low ball output state before the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the preview performance starts. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, if the number of variable display remaining after determination is equal to or less than the pre-read limit number of times, a pre-read preview effect is executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. You can do it like this.

Although the characteristic parts of the present invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 162SG, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game are set for a longer period than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. In addition to this, adjustments were made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by lengthening the special figure variable display time of some variable patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is lowered than when the ball output state is a low ball output state, and the determination ratio of probability variable jackpot B is lowered. The determination ratio may be increased. By doing this, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the jackpot type is more likely to be determined as variable probability jackpot B where the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot A where the number of lands is 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state.

Furthermore, as modification example 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variation) than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. By lowering the determination ratio of jackpot C) and increasing the determination ratio of non-probability variable jackpots, it may be possible to easily control the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the percentage of variable display results becoming jackpots is lower than in the variable probability state (high probability high base state), so as a result, 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive game state and control to the normal state, which reduces the number of consecutive jackpot games through the high base state. Adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" according to the present invention is the process of steps 162SGS190 to 162SGS194 (the process of determining the value of the time-saving counter and the process of determining the value of the time-saving counter) in the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. This corresponds to the part that executes the process of subtracting the value of the number of times counter, the process of rejudging the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction, the process of turning off the time saving flag.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the feature section 162SG changes the gaming state from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state) as an example. state), a high base state falling lottery (end lottery) is executed each time variable display is started in special symbol normal processing or variable display is ended in special symbol stop processing, and in this lottery Based on the fact that the player has won, the player may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) or low probability low base state, that is, the consecutive winning state may be terminated. In addition, in the case where the falling lottery is executed every time the variable display starts or ends the variable display, for example, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the ball output state is a low ball output state. It is only necessary to make it easier for people to win the falling lottery at a higher rate than in the case of the lottery. By doing this, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive winning state in the high ball winning state and control it to the normal state, thereby reducing the number of consecutive jackpot games that occur through the high base state. As a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process of executing a falling lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when executing the special symbol stop process. This corresponds to the process of turning off the probability change flag and time saving flag when the lottery is won.

Further, in the feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times. The first high ball state and the second high ball state are changed to the low ball state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball state and the second high ball state. Although the form of control has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball-out state flag to "1" and then controls the state of consecutive winnings. Based on the execution of a predetermined number of jackpot games (for example, 10 times) during the period, the value of the ball release state flag is set to "0", that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to "ball release state flag". may be set to ``1'' and then execute a predetermined number of jackpot games during the consecutive winning state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the number of ending times. Basically, the value of the ball release state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times. The first high ball state and the second high ball state are changed to the low ball state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball state and the second high ball state. Although the form of control has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball-out state flag to "1" and then controls the state of consecutive winnings. The value of the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of game balls that entered each winning slot or game balls that entered the out slot during the period reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). In other words, the "termination condition" of the present invention is "the number of game balls used in the game during the period of continuous winning state after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number. ”. By doing this, the CPU 103 can issue a ball based on the number of game balls used in the game reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) after setting the value of the ball release status flag to "1". The value of the ball status flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, if the value of the ball release state flag is "1" (first high ball release state) or "2" (second high ball release state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the adjustment is performed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state by prolonging the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the adjustment is performed according to the value of the ball release state flag. Adjustments may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state by varying the determination ratio of each variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-30 and 14-31 as modified example 162SG-5, a fluctuation pattern for missing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" (first ball dispensing state), and fluctuation pattern judgment table B for when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "2" (second ball dispensing state). ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(A), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, out of the possible range of 1 to 997 of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 600 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(B), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table B, out of the possible range of 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 400 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(C), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table C, out of the possible range of 1 to 997 for the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 200 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss has a higher proportion of non-reach fluctuation patterns determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss. While the rate is low, the rate at which the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure is a fluctuation pattern determination table in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for a loss, it is found that the fluctuation pattern determination table C for a loss has a higher proportion of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss. Although it is low, the rate at which the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure is a fluctuation pattern determination table in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure.

In other words, among these fluctuation pattern determination table A, fluctuation pattern determination table B, and fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the fluctuation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 14-31, if the variable display result is a loss when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "0", select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and change the fluctuation pattern. If the variable display result is a failure when the value of the ball output state flag is "1," select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, determine the fluctuation pattern, and change the value of the ball output state flag. If the variable display result is an error when the value is "2", it is sufficient to select the error variation pattern determination table B and determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to perform an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is a jackpot gaming state, and based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been controlled a specific number of times (5 times in the feature section 162SG) during the consecutive winning state. Although an example is given in which the value of the ball release state flag is set from "0" to "1", the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small winning game state. But that's fine. Particularly, the present invention can be frequently controlled to a small winning game state during a consecutive game state, and has a game feature in which a prize ball is paid out by a game ball landing in a big prize opening in these small winning game states. When applied to machines (so-called small winning rush machines), the total number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the number of times the game is controlled to the small win game state during the consecutive game state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the number of times) has been reached, it is possible to realize an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball dispensing state.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled to be a non-probable variable jackpot, the time saving control is executed 100 times in variable display after the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and a non-probable variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game is less than 100 times (for example, 50 or 30 times). In addition, when providing non-probable variable jackpots such as the number of times of time saving control such as 50 or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state). After the execution of the non-probable variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time saving control is executed according to the non-probable variable jackpot, the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of the ball release state flag is set to "1". Even if not, the value of the ball release state flag may be set to "0". In other words, if you win a non-probable variable jackpot in a consecutive winning state, and if you do not win a jackpot and return to a normal state in the time-saving state after the end of the non-probable variable jackpot game, you will be in the normal state. Based on this, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state may also be completed.

Further, in this specification, both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of feature section 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of feature section 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Both the invention of the feature section 109 and the invention of the feature section 162SG may be applied to one pachinko gaming machine.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 11... Main board 12... Performance control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays performance identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when the performance identification information becomes a specific display mode,
a movable body capable of moving between a first position that is a retreat position, a second position that is a suggestion position, and a third position that is a production position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means;
The performance execution means is
A specific performance that notifies the user that moving the movable body results in a performance result and the specific display mode and is controlled to the advantageous state; and moving the movable body before the specific performance is executed. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the specific performance is to be executed by
In the advantageous state that is controlled after notifying that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state,
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A grant amount display regarding the grant amount of gaming value can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
On the front side of the background display , a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount. A second notification display that is displayed, and a second notification display that is displayed.
The award amount after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means, which can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which winning is impossible or difficult, changes from the second state to the first state. display is possible and
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed without displaying the predetermined display at the start of the award amount display,
The grant amount display is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has passed from the start of the display,
The notification display is a display that ends after the specified period of time has elapsed from the start of the display,
The text display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the text display included in the provision amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character display is formed;
The background display is not visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the provision amount display,
The background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the notification display,
The specific character display included in the notification display has a smaller ratio of the specific area to the area forming the character display than the specific character display included in the application amount display,
The movable body is
In the suggestion production, the first position and the second position are movable,
A gaming machine that is movable between the first position and the third position in the specific performance.

Images